SIAE ALFOplus - User Manual Cod. MN00273E - Ediz.004 Ok

ALFOplus
Access Link Full Outdoor
User Manual
MN.00273.E - 004
The information contained in this handbook is subject to change without notice.

Property of Siae Microelettronica S.p.A. All rights reserved according to the law and according to the international regulations. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any
means, electronic or mechanical, without written permission from Siae Microelettronica S.p.A.
Unless otherwise specified, reference to a Company, name, data and address produced on the screen displayed is purely indicative aiming at illustrating the use of the product.
MS-DOS, MS Windows are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation
HP, HP OpenView NNM and HPUX are Hewlett Packard Company registered trademarks.
UNIX is a UNIX System Laboratories registered trademark.
Oracle is a Oracle Corporation registered trademark.
Linux term is a trademark registered by Linus Torvalds, the original author of the Linux operating system.
Linux is freely distributed according the GNU General Public License (GPL).
Other products cited here in are constructor registered trademarks.
Contents
Section 1.
USER GUIDE
1
2
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY ............................................................................... 7

FIRST AID FOR ELECTRICAL SHOCK AND SAFETY RULES .......................................... 8
2.1
FIRST AID FOR ELECTRICAL SHOCK ..................................................................... 8

2.1.1 Artificial respiration .................................................................................. 8
2.1.2 Treatment of burns .................................................................................. 8
2.2
SAFETY RULES .................................................................................................10
2.3
CORRECT DISPOSAL OF THIS PRODUCT (WASTE ELECTRICAL &

ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT) .................................................................................11
PURPOSE AND STRUCTURE OF THE MANUAL ............................................................12

3.1
PURPOSE OF THE MANUAL .................................................................................12
3.2
AUDIENCE BASIC KNOWLEDGE ..........................................................................12
3.3
STRUCTURE OF THE MANUAL .............................................................................12
Section 2.
DESCRIPTIONS AND SPECIFICATION
LIST OF ACRONYMS .................................................................................................15

4.1
15
LIST OF ACRONYMS ..........................................................................................15
SYSTEM PRESENTATION ..........................................................................................17

5.1
GENERAL.........................................................................................................17
5.2
APPLICATIONS .................................................................................................17
5.2.1 Functionality ..........................................................................................18
5.3
6
PROGRAMMABILITY ..........................................................................................18
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION ....................................................................................23

6.1
INTERNATIONAL STANDARD ..............................................................................23
6.2
MAIN CHARACTERISTICS...................................................................................25
6.2.1 Adaptive modulation ...............................................................................39
6.3
LINE INTERFACE CHARACTERISTICS ...................................................................42

6.3.1 Ethernet optical interface characteristics ....................................................46
MN.00273.E - 004
6.4
POWER SUPPLY AND CABLE ...............................................................................46

6.4.1 PoE injector ...........................................................................................47
6.5
6.4.1.1
PoE injector functionality ...........................................................47
6.4.1.2
Code table...............................................................................48
6.4.1.3
Electrical characteristics ............................................................49
6.4.1.4
Connectors ..............................................................................49
6.4.1.5
Description of alarms ................................................................49
WAVEGUIDE FLANGE ........................................................................................50
6.6
MECHANICAL CHARACTERISTICS........................................................................51
6.7
SURGE AND LIGHTNING PROTECTION .................................................................51
6.8
ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS ..........................................................................51
EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION ......................................................................................52

7.1
GENERAL.........................................................................................................52
7.1.1 Block diagram ........................................................................................52
7.1.2 Baseband processor ................................................................................55
7.1.2.1
Firmware ................................................................................55
7.1.2.2
Web Lct ..................................................................................55
7.1.2.3
Alarm system ..........................................................................55
7.1.3 TRX Transceiver unit ...............................................................................56

7.1.4 Switch for Ethernet ports .........................................................................56
7.1.5 Synchronisation ......................................................................................58
7.1.6 Adaptive code modulation ........................................................................59
7.1.7 ATPC and ACM interaction ........................................................................60
7.2
LOOPS ............................................................................................................62
7.3
RATE LIMITING AND INGRESS FILTER POLICING ..................................................62

7.3.1 Rate limiting ..........................................................................................62
7.3.2 Ingress filtering policy (CIR/EIR according to MEF 10.2) ...............................62
7.4
CONGESTION AVOIDANCE .................................................................................65
7.5
ETHERNET OAM (OPERATION ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE) .....................72

7.5.1 Service layer OAM...................................................................................72
7.6
ETHERNET PERFORMANCE MONITORING - RMON ..................................................74
7.7
RMON COUNTERS .............................................................................................75
7.8
ADVANCED STATISTIC MONITORING FOR SERVICES AND PRIORITY COUNTERS .......76

7.8.1 Priority RMON.........................................................................................76
7.8.2 Service RMON ........................................................................................77
7.9
SYNCHRONISM.................................................................................................77
7.10
SOURCES OF SYNCHRONISM .............................................................................79
7.11
PROVIDE SYNCHRONISM TO EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT .............................................80
7.12
G.8264 SSM SYNCHRONISATION STATUS MESSAGE...........................................81

7.12.1 SSM on Ethernet Interfaces ......................................................................82
Section 3.
INSTALLATION
85
INSTALLATION OF ALFOPlus SYSTEM ......................................................................85

8.1
GENERAL INFORMATION TO BE READ BEFORE THE INSTALLATION..........................85
8.2
GENERAL.........................................................................................................86
8.3
ELECTRICAL WIRING.........................................................................................86
MN.00273.E - 004
8.4
CONNECTIONS TO THE SUPPLY MAINS ................................................................86
8.5
GROUNDING CONNECTION ................................................................................87

8.5.1 Mounting instructions of grounding cable kit ICD00072F (universal - no tools).87
8.6
8.7
REQUIRED TOOLS FOR MOUNTING (NOT SUPPLIED) .............................................89

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ...............................................................................89
8.7.1 Standard coupling kit ..............................................................................89
8.8
INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE ODU WITH INTEGRATED ANTENNA .............89
8.8.1 ODU (Standard Lock) ..............................................................................89
8.9
8.8.1.1
1+0 ODU with integrated antenna ..............................................90
8.8.1.2
1+1 ODU with integrated antenna ..............................................90
INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE ODU WITH SEPARATED ANTENNA...............92

8.9.1 ODU (Standard Lock) ..............................................................................92
8.10
8.11
8.9.1.1
1+0 ODU with separated antenna...............................................92
8.9.1.2
1+1 ODU with separated antenna...............................................93
8.9.1.3
Waveguide towards the antenna.................................................93
GROUNDING ....................................................................................................94
USER CONNECTORS........................................................................................ 101
8.11.1 Auxiliary connector ............................................................................... 101
8.11.2 RJ45 connector..................................................................................... 103
8.11.3 Optical connector .................................................................................. 112
8.11.4 Optical SFP mounting procedure ............................................................. 113
8.11.5 Optical SFP unmounting procedure .......................................................... 113
Section 4.
LINE-UP
119
LINE-UP OF ALFOPlus SYSTEM ...............................................................................119

9.1
GENERAL....................................................................................................... 119
9.2
SWITCH ON ................................................................................................... 119
9.3
ALARM LED CHECK ......................................................................................... 120
9.4
CONNECTION PROCEDURE............................................................................... 120
9.5
FIRST CONFIGURATION................................................................................... 122
9.6
OPTIMIZING ANTENNA ALIGNMENT WITH RX MEASUREMENT ............................... 127
9.7
ODU ACCESSING AND REMOTE MANAGEMENT.................................................... 130
9.8
COMMISSIONING MEASURES FOR ETHERNET TRAFFIC ........................................ 131

9.8.1 Ethernet connection stability .................................................................. 131
9.9
FIRMWARE .................................................................................................... 132
9.10
BACK UP FULL EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION WITHOUT POSSIBILITY OF

MODIFYING THE PARAMETERS ......................................................................... 133
9.10.1 Scope.................................................................................................. 133
9.10.2 Configuration upload and download using SCT .......................................... 133
9.10.3 Configuration upload and download using WEBLCT .................................... 134
MN.00273.E - 004
Section 5.
MAINTENANCE
135
10 ALFOPlus ALARMS AND LOOPS...............................................................................135

10.1
GENERAL....................................................................................................... 135
10.2
ALARMS ........................................................................................................ 135

10.2.1 Alarm indications .................................................................................. 135
10.2.2 SCT/WebLCT displayed alarms................................................................ 136
11 ALFOPlus MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING ...............................................139

11.1
GENERAL....................................................................................................... 139
11.2
MAINTENANCE ............................................................................................... 139

11.2.1 Periodical checks .................................................................................. 139
11.2.2 Corrective maintenance (troubleshooting) ................................................ 140
11.3
TROUBLESHOOTING ....................................................................................... 140

11.3.1 Faulty condition detection ...................................................................... 140
11.3.2 Troubleshooting of a faulty unit .............................................................. 141
Section 6.
PROGRAMMING AND SUPERVISION
143
12 PROGRAMMING AND SUPERVISION .......................................................................143

12.1
12.2
GENERAL....................................................................................................... 143
SUPERVISION THROUGH ETHERNET.................................................................. 143
12.2.1 General ............................................................................................... 144
12.2.2 Configurations ...................................................................................... 145
12.2.3 "Local Access only" management ............................................................ 145
12.2.4 "VLAN based in-band" management ........................................................ 146
12.2.5 "VLAN based In-band" drop node ............................................................ 146
12.2.6 "Out-of-band" management ................................................................... 147
12.2.7 Configurability ...................................................................................... 147
12.2.8 Address ............................................................................................... 147
12.2.9 Restore supervisioning access mode ........................................................ 147
Section 7.
COMPOSITION
149
13 COMPOSITION .......................................................................................................149
13.1
GENERALS ..................................................................................................... 149
13.2
ALFOPLUS SYSTEM IDENTIFYING LABEL ............................................................ 149
13.3
AVAILABLE ALFOPLUS VERSIONS ..................................................................... 149
13.4
ODU INSTALLATION KIT .................................................................................. 154
MN.00273.E - 004
Section 8.
ADDENDUM
155
14 INTRODUCTION .....................................................................................................155
14.1
GENERALS ..................................................................................................... 155
15 ALFOplus 11GHZ CHARACTERISTICS......................................................................156

15.1
15.2
FOREWORD ................................................................................................... 156

GENERAL....................................................................................................... 156
15.2.1 Available frequencies............................................................................. 156
15.2.2 Transmitter characteristics ..................................................................... 161
15.2.3 Receiver characteristics ......................................................................... 162
15.2.4 Radio flange ......................................................................................... 164
15.2.5 Power supply and consumption ............................................................... 165
15.2.6 Mechanical characteristics ...................................................................... 165
16 ALFOPLUS 13GHz CHARACTERISTICS ....................................................................166

16.1
16.2
FOREWORD ................................................................................................... 166

GENERAL....................................................................................................... 166
16.2.4 Radio flange ......................................................................................... 172
17 ALFOPLUS 15GHz CHARACTERISTICS ....................................................................173

17.1
17.2
FOREWORD ................................................................................................... 173

GENERAL....................................................................................................... 173
17.2.4 Radio flange ......................................................................................... 184
18 ALFOPLUS 17 GHZ CHARACTERISTICS ...................................................................185

18.1
18.2
FOREWORD ................................................................................................... 185

GENERAL....................................................................................................... 185
18.2.4 Radio flange ......................................................................................... 190

19.1
19.2
FOREWORD ................................................................................................... 191

GENERAL....................................................................................................... 191
MN.00273.E - 004

19.2.4 Radio flange ......................................................................................... 199
20.1
FOREWORD ................................................................................................... 200
20.2
GENERAL....................................................................................................... 200
20.2.4 Radio flange ......................................................................................... 210

21.1
FOREWORD ................................................................................................... 212
21.2
GENERAL....................................................................................................... 212
21.2.4 Radio flange ......................................................................................... 217
Section 9.
LISTS AND SERVICES
219
22 LIST OF FIGURES ...................................................................................................219

23 LIST OF TABLES .....................................................................................................223
24 ASSISTANCE SERVICE............................................................................................227
MN.00273.E - 004
Section 1.
USER GUIDE
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
SIAE MICROELETTRONICA
Via Buonarroti, 21 - Cologno (MI) - Italy
DECLARES
THAT THE PRODUCTS
Digital Radio Relay System ALFOplus

comply with the essential requirements of article 3 of the
R&TTE Directive (1999/05/EC)
and therefore are marked:
The following standards have been applied:
IEEE 802.3 for Ethernet interface
EN 301 489-4 for EMC
EN 60950 for operator safety
EN 302 217 for digital point to point fixed radio
EN 300 132-2 characteristics of power supply
EN 300 019 climatic characteristics (in operation: class 4.1 for ODU; storing: class 1.2; transport: class
2.3)
The equipment makes use of non-harmonized frequency bands.Following the requirements
of the R&TTE Directive (article 12) and the relevant decision of the EC, in term of classification of Radio Equipment and Telecommunications Terminal Equipment and associated identifiers, the ALFO shall carry the 'class 2' identifier:
Cologno Monzese, 17/03/2008
MN.00273.E - 004
On behalf of SIAE MICROELETTRONICA

Chairman and Executive Officer
Alberto Mascetti
FIRST AID FOR ELECTRICAL SHOCK AND SAFETY

RULES
2.1
FIRST AID FOR ELECTRICAL SHOCK
Do not touch the bare hands until the circuit has been opened. pen the circuit by switching off the line
switches. If that is not possible protect yourself with dry material and free the patient from the conductor.
2.1.1
Artificial respiration
It is important to start mouth resuscitation at once and to call a doctor immediately. suggested procedure
for mouth to mouth resuscitation method is described in the Tab.1.
2.1.2
Treatment of burns
This treatment should be used after the patient has regained consciousness. It can also be employed while
artificial respiration is being applied (in this case there should be at least two persons present).
Warning
Do not attempt to remove clothing from burnt sections
Apply dry gauze on the burns
Do not apply ointments or other oily substances.
MN.00273.E - 004
Tab.1 - Artificial respiration

Step
Description
Lay the patient on his back with his arms parallel to the body.
If the patient is laying on an inclined plane, make sure that his
stomach is slightly lower than his chest. Open the patients
mouth and check that there is no foreign matter in mouth (dentures, chewing gum, etc.).
Figure
Kneel beside the patient level with his head. Put an hand under
the patients head and one under his neck.
2
Lift the patients head and let it recline backwards as far

as possible.
Shift the hand from the patients neck to his chin and his
mouth, the index along his jawbone, and keep the other fingers
closed together.
3
While performing these operations take a good supply of oxygen by taking deep breaths with your mouth open
With your thumb between the patients chin and mouth keep
his lips together and blow into his nasal cavities
While performing these operations observe if the patients

chest rises. If not it is possible that his nose is blocked: in that
case open the patients mouth as much as possible by pressing
on his chin with your hand, place your lips around his mouth
and blow into his oral cavity. Observe if the patients chest
heaves. This second method can be used instead of the first
even when the patients nose is not obstructed, provided his
nose is kept closed by pressing the nostrils together using the
hand you were holding his head with. The patients head must
be kept sloping backwards as much as possible.
Start with ten rapid expirations, hence continue at a rate of

twelve/fifteen expirations per minute. Go on like this until the
patient has regained consciousness, or until a doctor has ascertained his death.
MN.00273.E - 004
2.2
SAFETY RULES
When the equipment units are provided with the plate, shown in Fig.1, it means that they contain components electrostatic charge sensitive.
Fig.1 - Components electrostatic charge sensitive indication
In order to prevent the units from being damaged while handling, it is advisable to wear an elasticized band
(Fig.2) around the wrist ground connected through coiled cord (Fig.3).
Fig.2 - Elasticized band
Fig.3 - Coiled cord
The units showing the label, shown in Fig.4, include laser diodes and the emitted power can be dangerous
for eyes; avoid exposure in the direction of optical signal emission.
Fig.4 - Laser indication
10
MN.00273.E - 004
2.3
CORRECT DISPOSAL OF THIS PRODUCT (WASTE ELECTRICAL &

ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT)
(Applicable in the European Union and other European countries with separate collection systems). This
marking of Fig.5 shown on the product or its literature, indicates that it should not be disposed with other
household wastes at the end of its working life. To prevent possible harm to the environment or human
health from uncontrolled waste disposal, please separate this from other types of wastes and recycle it
responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources. Household users should contact either
the retailer where they purchased this product, or their local government office, for details of where and
how they can take this item for environmentally safe recycling. Business users should contact their supplier
and check the terms and conditions of the purchase contract. This product should not be mixed with other
commercial wastes for disposal.
Fig.5 - WEEE symbol - 2002/96/CE EN50419
MN.00273.E - 004
11
PURPOSE AND STRUCTURE OF THE MANUAL
3.1
PURPOSE OF THE MANUAL
The purpose of this manual consists in providing for the user information which permit to operate and
maintain the ALFOplus radio equipment.
Warning: This manual does not include information relevant to the SCT/WebLCT management program
windows and relevant application. They will provided by the program itself as helpon line.
3.2
AUDIENCE BASIC KNOWLEDGE
The following knowledge and skills are required to operate the equipment:
a basic understanding of microwave transmission
installation and maintenance experience on digital radio system
a good knowledge of IP networks and routing policy.
3.3
STRUCTURE OF THE MANUAL
The manual is subdivided into sections each of them developing a specific topic entitling the section.
Each section consists of a set of chapters, enlarging the main subject master.
Section 1 User Guide

It provides the information about the main safety rules and expounds the purpose and the structure of the
manual.
Section 2 Description and specifications

It describes a general overview of the typical applications and in particular of the whole radio equipment.
Section 3 Installation
The mechanical installation procedures are herein set down as well as the user electrical connections.
The content of the tool kit (if supplied) is also listed.
12
MN.00273.E - 004
Section 4 LineUp
Lineup procedures are described as well as checks to be carried out for the equipment correct operation.
The list of the instruments to be used and their characteristics are also set down.
Section 5 Maintenance
The routine maintenance actions are described as well as fault location procedures in order to identify the
faulty unit and to reestablish the operation after its replacement with a spare one.
Section 6 Programming and supervision

The ALFOplus radio is programmed and supervised using different software tools. Some of them are already available, some other will be available in the future. This section lists the tools implemented and
indicates if descriptions are already available.
Each description of software tools is supplied in a separated manual.
Section 7 Composition
Position, part numbers of the components the equipment consist of, are shown in this section.
Section 8 Addendum
ALFOplus technical radio specifications, available for each frequency, are described in this section.
Section 9 Indexes and services

Lists of figures, list of tables and assistance service are shown in this section.
MN.00273.E - 004
13
14
MN.00273.E - 004
Section 2.
DESCRIPTIONS AND
SPECIFICATION
LIST OF ACRONYMS
4.1
LIST OF ACRONYMS
What follows is a list of acronyms used in this handbook:

-
ACM
Adaptive Code Modulation
AGC
Automatic Gain Control
ATPC
Automatic Transmitted Power Control
BBP
Base Band Processor
BER
Bit Error Rate
CBS
Committed Burst Size
CF
Coupling Flag
CIR
Committed Information Rate
CoS
Class of Service
CVID
Customer VLAN Identifier
DSCP
Differentiated Serviced Code Point
EBS
Excess Burst Size
EIR
Excess Information Rate
ELP
Ethernet Line Protection
EVC
Ethernet Virtual Connection
FPGA
Field Programmable Gate-Array
IP ToS
Type of Service IP
LACP
Link Aggregation Control Protocol or Link Trunk
LAN
Local Area Network
MN.00273.E - 004
15
16
LLF
Link Loss Forwarding
LNA
Low Noise Amplifier
MAC
Media Access Control
MDI
Medium Dependent Interface
MDX
Medium Dependent Interface Crossover
MEF
Metro Ethernet Forum
NE
Network Element
OAM
Operation Administration and Maintenance
ODU
Outdoor Unit
PLL
Phase Locked Loop
POE
Power Over Ethernet
PToS
Priority Type of Service
QAM
Quadrature Amplitude Modulation
RED
Random Early Drop
RF
Radio Frequency
RSSI
Received Signal Strength Indicator
RX
Direction from antenna to user
SCT
Subnetwork Craft Terminal
SNMP
Simple Network Management Protocol
SVID
Service VLAN Identifier
TX
Direction from user to antenna
UNI
User Network Interface
VCO
Voltage Controlled Oscillator
VID
Virtual Lan Identifier
VLAN
Virtual LAN
WEBLCT
WEB Local Craft Terminal
WRR
Weighted Round Robin
MN.00273.E - 004
SYSTEM PRESENTATION
5.1
GENERAL
ALFOplus is a full-outdoor and full IP digital radio system for point-to-point applications, used for high capacity Ethernet transport (1 Gbps). The frequency range is from 6 GHz up to 42 GHz with hitless adaptive
code modulation (from 4QAM up to 1024QAM).
There are two available versions for ALFOplus: Gigabit Electrical (GE) and Gigabit Optical (GO). This document provides a general overview of ALFOplus (Access Link Full Outdoor) radio equipment.
5.2
APPLICATIONS
ALFOplus is the ideal solution in urban environments for all carrier-class applications in which the typical
requirements are Ethernet connections:
full IP radio, providing the foundation for a leading edge network
fully integrable with 3G, 4G, LTE nodes and backhaul
ideal for a fast and flexible evolution towards full IP network
complementary solutions for fibre deploy
last mile fibre extension for business customers
ISP high capacity and performance, for LAN-to-LAN connections
emergency wireless links
zero footprint applications
ALFOplus doesnt need any indoor unit; power supply can be directly by POE+ through the data cable or
through a dedicated auxiliary port. Its available 1+0 or 1+1 radio system configurable via software following two versions of ALFOplus:
Electrical Gigabit Version

-
LAN1 - 1x10/100/1000BaseT traffic and/or supervision port with clock, synchronism recovery
and PoE
LAN2 - 1x10/100/1000BaseT supervision and/or traffic port with clock and synchronism recovery
Optical Gigabit Version

-
LAN1 - 1x100/1000BaseX traffic and/or supervision port with clock and synchronism recovery
LAN2 - 1x100/1000BaseT supervision and/or traffic port with clock, synchronism recovery and
PoE
depending on software configuration made for each port LAN1 and LAN2.
MN.00273.E - 004
17
5.2.1
Functionality
SIAE ALFOplus radio system presents the same functionalities of a switch (Layer 2).
ALFOplus radio system is able to forward Virtual LAN in transparent way or to manage incoming traffic filtering it or tagging it or dividing it in different VLAN. Traffic Flow control and Traffic priority capabilities can
be enabled or disabled via LAN software.
ALFOplus Ethernet switch functionality:
MAC switching, Learning and Ageing
Jumbo Frame up to 10 kbytes
MEF 10.2 bandwidth profiles for Ethernet Services
IEEE 802.1Q VLAN/IEEE VLAN stacking QinQ and VLAN rewriting
LLF (Link Loss Forwarding)
IEEE 802.3x Flow control
Flexible QoS based on VLAN (IEEE 802.1p), MPLS Exp BIT, ToS/DSCP (IPV4 or IPV6) per Port,
802.1p rewrite with MPLS
Queue Packet with Drop Policy: Tail Drop, Queue Drop, Red, Wred/Strict, WFQ, Mixed
Ethernet Frame Fragmentation
Advanced multi-layer 1/2/3/4 header Ethernet compressor algorithm
IEEE 802.1d STP (Spanning Tree Protocol)
IEEE 802.1v RSTP (Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol)
IEEE 802.1ag OAM (Operation, Administration and Maintenance)/ITU-T y.1731/IEEE 802.3 ah
IEEE 802.3ad LACP - Link Aggregation Control Protocol or Trunking Line or Link Aggregation
IEEE 802.3af PoE - Power over Ethernet
Complete Synchronisation Management IEEE 1588 v2 precision time protocol and SSM G8264
(quality SyncE)
ELP (Ethernet Line Protection)
ITU G.8032 v2 Ethernet Ring Protection
Advanced Statistics Monitoring Based VLAN and Priority
Ethernet performance monitoring - RMon
5.3
PROGRAMMABILITY
ALFOplus radio system is managed by a microprocessor that makes it totally programmable via software
to perform the following functions:
radio link management

-
capacity and modulation
Link ID
Tx frequency and power
ATPC (Automatic Transmission Power Control)
main management
-
18
IP port configurable and supervisioning
With dispensation to maximum power
MN.00273.E - 004
routing table
remote element list
alarm severity configuration (modify alarm)
user manager (password, user, SNMP login)
operation and maintenance

-
permanent Tx Off
Rx signal threshold alarm
performance monitoring (G.828, Rx PWR, Tx PWR, ACM) with alarm threshold
S/N measure
LAN summary, statistic basis on port, VLAN or Priority
back-up/restore configuration
software update
report&logger maintenance (inventory, fault, commands)
SNTP alignment
manual operations (depends on timeout)

-
Tx transmitter OFF
force switch synch
radio BER test
radio loop
Ethernet switch management and functionalities
synchronisation
More links can be managed by LAN access (see Fig.7).
MN.00273.E - 004
19
157 mm
254 mm
254 mm
Fig.6 - ALFOplus front/side view
20
MN.00273.E - 004
Fig.7 - Reachable links in ALFOplus sub-network
MN.00273.E - 004
21
ALFO
plus
payload (VLANx) +
manag. (VLANy)
ALFO
plus
Inband management (with VLAN)
manag. 2
ALFO
plus
Outband management (without VLAN)
payload 1
payload +
manag.
Inband management (without VLAN)
ALFO
plus
ALFO
plus
ALFO
plus
ALFO
plus
ALFO
plus
ALFO
plus
ALFO
plus
ALFO
plus
ALFO
plus
payload +
manag.
payload +
manag.
payload +
manag.
payload +
manag.
ALFO
plus
ALFO
plus
Switch
Switch
Fig.8 - In-band management
payload +
manag.
ALFO
plus
ALFO
plus
management only
payload +
manag.
management only
IP1
IP1
IP2
IP2
Fig.9 - Drop node
payload
1
2
management only
ALFO 1
plus 2
X
ALFO
plus
X
MNGT
payload
management only
MNGT
Fig.10 - LAO (Local Access Only)
22
MN.00273.E - 004
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
For more details, refer to Section 8. ADDENDUM.
6.1
INTERNATIONAL STANDARD
The equipment complies with the following international standard:

-
EMC
EN 301 489-4
RF channel arrangement
see Tab.2
Tab.2 - Go-return frequency
Frequency band
(GHz)
Duplex Spacing
Channel number
Subbands
6L
ITU-R F.383-8 and CEPT REC 14-01E - 252.04 MHz
3CH @ 29.65MHz
6U
ITU-R F.384-10 - 340 MHz
3CH @ 40MHz
7.1 - 7.4
ITU-R F.385-9 Annex 3 - 196 MHz
3CH @ 28MHz
7.1 - 7.4
ITU-R F.385-9 - 161 MHz
2CH @ 28MHz
7.1 - 7.4
CEPT REC(02)06 - 154 MHz
2CH @ 28MHz
7.1 - 7.4
168 MHz
2CH @ 28MHz
7.4 - 7.7
ITU-R F.385-9 - 161 MHz
2CH @ 28MHz
7.4 - 7.7
CEPT REC(02)06 - 154 MHz
2CH @ 28MHz
7.4 - 7.7
2CH @ 28MHz
7.4 - 7.9
2CH @ 28MHz
7.7 - 8.2
ITU-R F.386-8 Annex 6 - 311.32 MHz
4CH @ 29.65MHz
7.9 - 8.5
CEPT ECC REC(02)06 310 MHz
3CH @ 28MHz
8.2 - 8.5
ITU-R F.386-6 Annex 3 - 119/126 MHz
2CH @ 28MHz
7.9 - 8.4
3CH @ 28MHz
11
CEPT T/R 12-06 and ITU-R F387-10 - 490/530 MHz
4CH @ 40MHz
13
ITU-R F.497 - CEPT ERC/REC 12-02 E - 266MHz
3CH @ 28MHz
15
ITU-R F636 - 420 MHz
4CH @ 28MHz
15
4CH @ 28MHz
15
4CH @ 28MHz
15
CEPT T/R 12-07 - 728 MHz
4CH @ 28MHz
MN.00273.E - 004
23
24
15
CEPT - 315 MHz
3CH @ 28MHz
15
CEPT - 322 MHz
3CH @ 28MHz
17
SRD ERC REC 70-03 (unlicensed)
12CH @ 28 MHz
18
ITU-R F.595 - Annex 7 - 1560 MHz
15CH @ 27.5MHz
23
ITU-R F.637-3 - Annex 3 CEPT T/R 13-02 - 1008 MHz
11CH @ 28MHz
23
ITU-R F.637-3 - Annex 4 - 1200 MHz
11CH @ 28MHz
23
ITU-R F.637-3 - Annex1 - 1232 MHz
11CH @ 28MHz
26
ITU-R F.748 - Annex 1 and CEPT T/R 13-02 - 1008 MHz
16CH @ 28MHz
32
ITU-R F.1520 and CEPT Rec (01)02 - 812 MHz
10CH @ 28MHz
38
ITU-R F.749 and CEPT Rec T/R 12-01 - 1260 MHz
20CH @ 28MHz
42
ECC Rec (01)04 - 1500 MHz
18CH @ 28MHz (520 MHz)
Digital fixed point to point
EN 301 128
Climatic characteristics
EN 300 019 (class 4.1 for ODU;

storage: class 1.2; transport: class 2.3)
Safety
EN60950
MN.00273.E - 004
6.2
MAIN CHARACTERISTICS
Tx power
see Tab.3
Tolerance
2dB
Tab.3 - Tx power
ALFOplus series
Nominal output power (dBm)
Frequency Band
(GHz)
4SQAM
4QAM
16SQAM
16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
256LQAM
512QAM
1KQAM
28
28
25
25
24
24
24
24
24
24
23
28
28
25
25
24
24
24
24
24
24
23
28
28
25
25
24
24
24
24
24
24
23
10.5
28
28
25
25
24
24
24
24
24
24
23
11
27
27
24
24
23
23
23
23
23
23
22
13
27
27
24
24
23
23
23
23
23
23
22
15
27
27
24
24
23
23
23
23
23
23
22
17
22
22
20
20
18
18
18
18
18
18
17
18
23
23
21
21
19
19
19
19
19
19
18
23
23
23
21
21
19
19
19
19
19
19
18
26
22
22
20
20
18
18
18
18
18
18
17
28
21
21
19
19
17
17
17
17
17
17
16
32
20
20
18
18
16
16
16
16
16
16
15
38
19
19
17
17
15
15
15
15
15
15
14
42
17
17
15
15
13
13
13
13
13
13
12
RF output attenuation
up to 20 dB, 1 dB step software adjustable
Automatic transmit power control (ATPC range
20 dB, implemented in 1dB step
Remote transmit power control (RTPC range
20 dB, implemented
Transmitter return loss
GB8000 15 dB
GB9000 6 dB
Stability in frequency
5ppm, 10ppm (including ageing)
Muting
60dB, related to maximum transmitted power
Receiver threshold with BER = 10-3
see Tab.4
MN.00273.E - 004
25
Tab.4 - Receiver thresholds (interleave enabled)

Radio Nominal RSL
Threshold (dBm)
Channel bandwidth
MHz
7
4SQAM
4QAM
16SQAM
16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
512QAM
1KQAM
BER=10-6
-95.5
-93.0
-89.5
-86.5
-84.5
-82.0
-78.5
-76.0
-73.0
-69.5
BER=10-10
-93.5
-91.0
-87.5
-84.5
-82.5
-80.0
-76.5
-74.0
-71.0
-67.5
BER=10
-94.5
-91.5
-88.0
-85.0
-83.0
-80.5
-77.0
-74.5
-71.5
-67.5
BER=10-10
-92.5
-89.5
-86.0
-83.0
-81.0
-78.5
-75.0
-72.5
-69.5
-65.5
BER=10-6
-94.5
-91.0
-87.5
-84.5
-82.5
-80.0
-76.5
-73.5
-70.5
-66.5
BER=10-10
-6
10
14
28
30
56
6 GHz
Physical Mode
-92.5
-89.0
-85.5
-82.5
-80.5
-78.0
-74.5
-71.5
-68.5
-64.5
-6
-91.5
-88.0
-84.5
-81.5
-80.0
-77.0
-74.0
-70.5
-68.0
-64.0
-10
BER=10
-89.5
-86.0
-82.5
-79.5
-78.0
-75.0
-72.0
-68.5
-66.0
-62.0
BER=10-6
BER=10
-91.0
-87.5
-84.0
-81.0
-79.5
-76.5
-73.5
-70.0
-67.5
-63.5
-10
-89.0
-85.5
-82.0
-79.0
-77.5
-74.5
-71.5
-68.0
-65.5
-61.5
-6
BER=10
-88.5
-85.0
-81.5
-78.5
-76.5
-74.0
-71.0
-67.5
-65.0
-60.5
BER=10-10
-86.5
-83.0
-79.5
-76.5
-74.5
-72.0
-69.0
-65.5
-63.0
-58.5
BER=10
Radio Guaranteed RSL

Threshold (dBm)
Channel bandwidth
MHz
7
4SQAM
4QAM
16SQAM
16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
512QAM
1KQAM
BER=10-6
-93.5
-91.0
-87.5
-84.5
-82.5
-80.0
-76.5
-74.0
-71.0
-67.5
BER=10-10
-91.5
-89.0
-85.5
-82.5
-80.5
-78.0
-74.5
-72.0
-69.0
-65.5
BER=10
-92.5
-89.5
-86.0
-83.0
-81.0
-78.5
-75.0
-72.5
-69.5
-65.5
BER=10-10
-90.5
-87.5
-84.0
-81.0
-79.0
-76.5
-73.0
-70.5
-67.5
-63.5
BER=10-6
-92.5
-89.0
-85.5
-82.5
-80.5
-78.0
-74.5
-71.5
-68.5
-64.5
BER=10
-90.5
-87.0
-83.5
-80.5
-78.5
-76.0
-72.5
-69.5
-66.5
-62.5
BER=10-6
-89.5
-86.0
-82.5
-79.5
-78.0
-75.0
-72.0
-68.5
-66.0
-62.0
BER=10-10
-87.5
-84.0
-80.5
-77.5
-76.0
-73.0
-70.0
-66.5
-64.0
-60.0
BER=10
-89.0
-85.5
-82.0
-79.0
-77.5
-74.5
-71.5
-68.0
-65.5
-61.5
BER=10-10
-87.0
-83.5
-80.0
-77.0
-75.5
-72.5
-69.5
-66.0
-63.5
-59.5
BER=10-6
-86.5
-83.0
-79.5
-76.5
-74.5
-72.0
-69.0
-65.5
-63.0
-58.5
-84.5
-81.0
-77.5
-74.5
-72.5
-70.0
-67.0
-63.5
-61.0
-56.5
-6
10
14
28
-10
-6
30
56
26
Physical Mode
-10
BER=10
MN.00273.E - 004
Radio Nominal RSL

Threshold (dBm)
Channel bandwidth
MHz
7
14
4SQAM
4QAM
16SQAM
16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
512QAM
1KQAM
-95.5
-93.0
-89.5
-86.5
-84.5
-82.0
-78.5
-76.0
-73.0
-69.5
BER=10
-93.5
-91.0
-87.5
-84.5
-82.5
-80.0
-76.5
-74.0
-71.0
-67.5
BER=10-6
-94.5
-91.0
-87.5
-84.5
-82.5
-80.0
-76.5
-73.5
-70.5
-66.5
BER=10-10
-92.5
-89.0
-85.5
-82.5
-80.5
-78.0
-74.5
-71.5
-68.5
-64.5
BER=10
-91.5
-88.0
-84.5
-81.5
-80.0
-77.0
-74.0
-70.5
-68.0
-64.0
BER=10-10
-89.5
-86.0
-82.5
-79.5
-78.0
-75.0
-72.0
-68.5
-66.0
-62.0
BER=10-6
-88.5
-85.0
-81.5
-78.5
-76.5
-74.0
-71.0
-67.5
-65.0
-60.5
BER=10-10
-86.5
-83.0
-79.5
-76.5
-74.5
-72.0
-69.0
-65.5
-63.0
-58.5
BER=10-6
-10
-6
28
56
7 GHz
Physical Mode

Threshold (dBm)
Channel bandwidth
MHz
7
4SQAM
4QAM
16SQAM
16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
512QAM
1KQAM
BER=10-6
-93.5
-91.0
-87.5
-84.5
-82.5
-80.0
-76.5
-74.0
-71.0
-67.5
BER=10-10
-91.5
-89.0
-85.5
-82.5
-80.5
-78.0
-74.5
-72.0
-69.0
-65.5
BER=10
-92.5
-89.0
-85.5
-82.5
-80.5
-78.0
-74.5
-71.5
-68.5
-64.5
BER=10-10
-90.5
-87.0
-83.5
-80.5
-78.5
-76.0
-72.5
-69.5
-66.5
-62.5
BER=10-6
-89.5
-86.0
-82.5
-79.5
-78.0
-75.0
-72.0
-68.5
-66.0
-62.0
BER=10
-87.5
-84.0
-80.5
-77.5
-76.0
-73.0
-70.0
-66.5
-64.0
-60.0
BER=10-6
-86.5
-83.0
-79.5
-76.5
-74.5
-72.0
-69.0
-65.5
-63.0
-58.5
BER=10-10
-84.5
-81.0
-77.5
-74.5
-72.5
-70.0
-67.0
-63.5
-61.0
-56.5
-6
14
28
56
Physical Mode
-10
MN.00273.E - 004
27
Radio Nominal RSL

Threshold (dBm)
Channel bandwidth
MHz
7
10
4SQAM
4QAM
16SQAM
16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
512QAM
1KQAM
-95.0
-92.5
-89.0
-86.0
-84.0
-81.5
-78.0
-75.5
-72.5
-69.0
BER=10
-93.0
-90.5
-87.0
-84.0
-82.0
-79.5
-76.0
-73.5
-70.5
-67.5
BER=10-6
-94.0
-91.0
-87.5
-84.5
-82.5
-80.0
-76.5
-74.0
-71.0
-67.0
BER=10-10
-92.0
-89.0
-85.5
-82.5
-80.5
-78.0
-74.5
-72.0
-69.0
-65.0
BER=10
-94.0
-90.5
-87.0
-84.0
-82.0
-79.5
-76.0
-73.0
-70.0
-66.0
BER=10-10
-92.0
-88.5
-85.0
-82.0
-80.0
-77.5
-74.0
-71.0
-68.0
-64.0
BER=10-6
-91.0
-87.5
-84.0
-81.0
-79.5
-76.5
-73.5
-70.0
-67.5
-63.5
BER=10-10
BER=10-6
-10
-6
14
28
30
40
56
11
GHz
Physical Mode
-89.0
-85.5
-82.0
-79.0
-77.5
-74.5
-71.5
-68.0
-65.5
-61.5
-6
-90.5
-87.0
-83.5
-80.5
-79.0
-76.0
-73.0
-69.5
-67.0
-63.0
-10
BER=10
-88.5
-85.0
-81.5
-78.5
-77.0
-74.0
-71.0
-67.5
-65.0
-61.0
BER=10-6
-89.5
-86.0
-82.5
-79.5
-77.5
-75.0
-72.0
-68.5
-66.0
-61.5
BER=10
-87.5
-84.0
-80.5
-77.5
-75.5
-73.0
-70.0
-66.5
-64.0
-59.5
BER=10-6
-88.0
-84.5
-81.0
-78.0
-76.0
-73.5
-70.5
-67.0
-64.5
-60.0
BER=10-10
-86.0
-82.5
-79.0
-76.0
-74.0
-71.5
-68.5
-65.0
-62.5
-58.0
BER=10
-10

Threshold (dBm)
Channel bandwidth
MHz
7
4SQAM
4QAM
16SQAM
16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
512QAM
1KQAM
BER=10-6
-93.0
-90.5
-87.0
-84.0
-82.0
-79.5
-76.0
-73.5
-70.5
-67.0
BER=10-10
-91.0
-88.5
-85.0
-82.0
-80.0
-77.5
-74.0
-71.5
-68.5
-65.0
BER=10
-92.0
-89.0
-85.5
-82.5
-80.5
-78.0
-74.5
-72.0
-69.0
-65.0
BER=10-10
-90.0
-87.0
-83.5
-80.5
-78.5
-76.0
-72.5
-70.0
-67.0
-63.0
BER=10-6
-92.0
-88.5
-85.0
-82.0
-80.0
-77.5
-74.0
-71.0
-68.0
-64.0
BER=10
-90.0
-86.5
-83.0
-80.0
-78.0
-75.5
-72.0
-69.0
-66.0
-62.0
BER=10-6
-89.0
-85.5
-82.0
-79.0
-77.5
-74.5
-71.5
-68.0
-65.5
-61.5
BER=10-10
-87.0
-83.5
-80.0
-77.0
-75.5
-72.5
-69.5
-66.0
-63.5
-59.5
BER=10
-88.5
-85.0
-81.5
-78.5
-77.0
-74.0
-71.0
-67.5
-65.0
-61.0
BER=10-10
-86.5
-83.0
-79.5
-76.5
-75.0
-72.0
-69.0
-65.5
-63.0
-59.0
BER=10-6
-87.5
-84.0
-80.5
-77.5
-75.5
-73.0
-70.0
-66.5
-64.0
-59.5
BER=10
-85.5
-82.0
-78.5
-75.5
-73.5
-71.0
-68.0
-64.5
-62.0
-57.5
BER=10-6
-86.0
-82.5
-79.0
-76.0
-74.0
-71.5
-68.5
-65.0
-62.5
-58.0
BER=10-10
-84.0
-80.5
-77.0
-74.0
-72.0
-69.5
-66.5
-63.0
-60.5
-56.0
-6
10
14
28
-10
-6
30
40
56
28
Physical Mode
-10
MN.00273.E - 004
Radio Nominal RSL

Threshold (dBm)
Channel bandwidth
MHz
7
14
4SQAM
4QAM
16SQAM
16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
512QAM
1KQAM
-95.0
-92.5
-89.0
-86.0
-84.0
-81.5
-78.0
-75.5
-72.5
-69.0
BER=10
-93.0
-90.5
-87.0
-84.0
-82.0
-79.5
-76.0
-73.5
-70.5
-67.0
BER=10-6
-94.0
-90.5
-87.0
-84.0
-82.0
-79.5
-76.0
-73.0
-70.0
-66.0
BER=10-10
-92.0
-88.5
-85.0
-82.0
-80.0
-77.5
-74.0
-71.0
-68.0
-64.0
BER=10
-91.0
-87.5
-84.0
-81.0
-79.5
-76.5
-73.5
-70.0
-67.5
-63.5
BER=10-10
-89.0
-85.5
-82.0
-79.0
-77.5
-74.5
-71.5
-68.0
-65.5
-61.5
BER=10-6
-88.0
-84.5
-81.0
-78.0
-76.0
-73.5
-70.5
-67.0
-64.5
-60.0
BER=10-10
-86.0
-82.5
-79.0
-76.0
-74.0
-71.5
-68.5
-65.0
-62.5
-58.0
BER=10-6
-10
-6
28
56
13
GHz
Physical Mode

Threshold (dBm)
Channel bandwidth
MHz
7
4SQAM
4QAM
16SQAM
16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
512QAM
1KQAM
BER=10-6
-93.0
-90.5
-87.0
-84.0
-82.0
-79.5
-76.0
-73.5
-70.5
-67.0
BER=10-10
-91.0
-88.5
-85.0
-82.0
-80.0
-77.5
-74.0
-71.5
-68.5
-65.0
BER=10
-92.0
-88.5
-85.0
-82.0
-80.0
-77.5
-74.0
-71.0
-68.0
-64.0
BER=10-10
-90.0
-86.5
-83.0
-80.0
-78.0
-75.5
-72.0
-69.0
-66.0
-62.0
BER=10-6
-89.0
-85.5
-82.0
-79.0
-77.5
-74.5
-71.5
-68.0
-65.5
-61.5
BER=10
-87.0
-83.5
-80.0
-77.0
-75.5
-72.5
-69.5
-66.0
-63.5
-59.5
BER=10-6
-86.0
-82.5
-79.0
-76.0
-74.0
-71.5
-68.5
-65.0
-62.5
-58.0
BER=10-10
-84.0
-80.5
-77.0
-74.0
-72.0
-69.5
-66.5
-63.0
-60.5
-56.0
-6
14
28
56
Physical Mode
-10
MN.00273.E - 004
29
Radio Nominal RSL

Threshold (dBm)
Channel bandwidth
MHz
7
14
4SQAM
4QAM
16SQAM
16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
512QAM
1KQAM
-95.0
-92.5
-89.0
-86.0
-84.0
-81.5
-78.0
-75.5
-72.5
-69.0
BER=10
-93.0
-90.5
-87.0
-84.0
-82.0
-79.5
-76.0
-73.5
-70.5
-67.0
BER=10-6
-94.0
-90.5
-87.0
-84.0
-82.0
-79.5
-76.0
-73.0
-70.0
-66.0
BER=10-10
-92.0
-88.5
-85.0
-82.0
-80.0
-77.5
-74.0
-71.0
-68.0
-64.0
BER=10
-91.0
-87.5
-84.0
-81.0
-79.5
-76.5
-73.5
-70.0
-67.5
-63.5
BER=10-10
-89.0
-85.5
-82.0
-79.0
-77.5
-74.5
-71.5
-68.0
-65.5
-61.5
BER=10-6
-88.0
-84.5
-81.0
-78.0
-76.0
-73.5
-70.5
-67.0
-64.5
-60.0
BER=10-10
-86.0
-82.5
-79.0
-76.0
-74.0
-71.5
-68.5
-65.0
-62.5
-58.0
BER=10-6
-10
-6
28
56
15
GHz
Physical Mode

Threshold (dBm)
Channel bandwidth
MHz
7
4SQAM
4QAM
16SQAM
16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
512QAM
1KQAM
BER=10-6
-93.0
-90.5
-87.0
-84.0
-82.0
-79.5
-76.0
-73.5
-70.5
-67.0
BER=10-10
-91.0
-88.5
-85.0
-82.0
-80.0
-77.5
-74.0
-71.5
-68.5
-65.0
BER=10
-92.0
-88.5
-85.0
-82.0
-80.0
-77.5
-74.0
-71.0
-68.0
-64.0
BER=10-10
-90.0
-86.5
-83.0
-80.0
-78.0
-75.5
-72.0
-69.0
-66.0
-62.0
BER=10-6
-89.0
-85.5
-82.0
-79.0
-77.5
-74.5
-71.5
-68.0
-65.5
-61.5
BER=10
-87.0
-83.5
-80.0
-77.0
-75.5
-72.5
-69.5
-66.0
-63.5
-59.5
BER=10-6
-86.0
-82.5
-79.0
-76.0
-74.0
-71.5
-68.5
-65.0
-62.5
-58.0
BER=10-10
-84.0
-80.5
-77.0
-74.0
-72.0
-69.5
-66.5
-63.0
-60.5
-56.0
-6
14
28
56
30
Physical Mode
-10
MN.00273.E - 004
Radio Nominal RSL

Threshold (dBm)
Channel bandwidth
MHz
7
14
4SQAM
4QAM
16SQAM
16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
512QAM
1KQAM
-93.5
-91.0
-87.5
-84.5
-82.5
-80.0
-76.5
-74.0
-71.0
-67.5
BER=10
-91.5
-89.0
-85.5
-82.5
-80.5
-78.0
-74.5
-72.0
-69.0
-65.5
BER=10-6
-92.5
-89.0
-85.5
-82.5
-80.5
-78.0
-74.5
-71.5
-68.5
-64.5
BER=10-10
-90.5
-87.0
-83.5
-80.5
-78.5
-76.0
-72.5
-69.5
-66.5
-62.5
BER=10
-89.5
-86.0
-82.5
-79.5
-78.0
-75.0
-72.0
-68.5
-66.0
-62.0
BER=10-10
-87.5
-84.0
-80.5
-77.5
-76.0
-73.0
-70.0
-66.5
-64.0
-60.0
BER=10-6
-86.5
-83.0
-79.5
-76.5
-74.5
-72.0
-69.0
-65.5
-63.0
-58.5
BER=10-10
-84.5
-81.0
-77.5
-74.5
-72.5
-70.0
-67.0
-63.5
-61.0
-56.5
BER=10-6
-10
-6
28
56
17
GHz
Physical Mode

Threshold (dBm)
Channel bandwidth
MHz
7
4SQAM
4QAM
16SQAM
16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
512QAM
1KQAM
BER=10-6
-91.5
-89.0
-85.5
-82.5
-80.5
-78.0
-74.5
-72.0
-69.0
-65.5
BER=10-10
-89.5
-87.0
-83.5
-80.5
-78.5
-76.0
-72.5
-70.0
-67.0
-63.5
BER=10
-90.5
-87.0
-83.5
-80.5
-78.5
76.0
72.5
-69.5
-66.5
-62.5
BER=10-10
-88.5
-85.0
-81.5
-78.5
-76.5
-74.0
-70.5
-67.5
-64.5
-60.5
BER=10-6
-87.5
-84.0
-80.5
-77.5
-76.0
-73.0
-70.0
-66.5
-64.0
-60.0
BER=10
-85.5
-82.0
-78.5
-75.5
-74.0
-71.0
-68.0
-64.5
-62.0
-58.0
BER=10-6
-84.5
-81.0
-77.5
-74.5
-72.5
-70.0
-67.0
-63.5
-61.0
-56.5
BER=10-10
-82.5
-79.0
-75.5
-72.5
-70.5
-68.0
-65.0
-61.5
-59.0
-54.4
-6
14
28
56
Physical Mode
-10
MN.00273.E - 004
31
Radio Nominal RSL

Threshold (dBm)
Channel bandwidth
MHz
7
10
4SQAM
4QAM
16SQAM
16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
512QAM
1KQAM
-94.5
-92.0
-88.5
-85.5
-83.5
-81.0
-77.5
-75.0
-72.0
-68.5
BER=10
-92.5
-90.0
-86.5
-83.5
-81.5
-79.0
-75.5
-73.0
-70.0
-66.5
BER=10-6
-93.5
-90.5
-87.0
-84.0
-82.0
-79.5
-76.0
-73.5
-70.5
-66.5
BER=10-10
-91.5
-88.5
-85.0
-82.0
-80.0
-77.5
-74.0
-71.5
-68.5
-64.5
BER=10
-93.5
-90.0
-86.5
-83.5
-81.5
-79.0
-75.5
-72.5
-69.5
-65.5
BER=10-10
-91.5
-88.0
-84.5
-81.5
-79.5
-77.0
-73.5
-70.5
-67.5
-63.5
BER=10-6
-92.0
-88.5
-85.0
-82.0
-80.0
-77.5
-74.0
-71.0
-68.0
-64.0
BER=10-10
BER=10-6
-10
-6
14
20
28
30
40
-90.0
-86.5
-83.0
-80.0
-78.0
-75.5
-72.0
-69.0
-66.0
-62.0
-6
-90.5
-87.0
-83.5
-80.5
-79.0
-76.0
-73.0
-69.5
-67.0
-63.0
-10
BER=10
-88.5
-85.0
-81.5
-78.5
-77.0
-74.0
-71.0
-67.5
-65.0
-61.0
BER=10-6
-90.0
-86.5
-83.0
-80.0
-78.5
-75.5
-72.5
-69.0
-66.5
-62.5
BER=10
-88.0
-84.5
-81.0
-78.0
-76.5
-73.5
-70.5
-67.0
-64.5
-60.5
BER=10-6
-89.0
-85.5
-82.0
-79.0
-77.0
-74.5
-71.5
-68.0
-65.5
-61.0
BER=10-10
-87.0
-83.5
-80.0
-77.0
-75.0
-72.5
-69.5
-66.0
-63.5
-59.0
BER=10
-88.0
-84.5
-81.0
-78.0
-76.0
-73.5
-70.5
-67.0
-64.5
-60.0
BER=10-10
-86.0
-82.5
-79.0
-76.0
-74.0
-71.5
-68.5
-65.0
-62.5
-58.0
BER=10-6
-87.5
-84.0
-80.5
-77.5
-75.5
-73.0
-70.0
-66.5
-64.0
-59.5
-85.5
-82.0
-78.5
-75.5
-73.5
-71.0
-68.0
-64.5
-62.0
-57.5
BER=10
-10
-6
50
56
18
GHz
Physical Mode
-10
BER=10

Threshold (dBm)
Channel bandwidth
MHz
7
10
4SQAM
4QAM
16SQAM
16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
512QAM
1KQAM
-92.5
-90.0
-86.5
-83.5
-81.5
-79.0
-75.5
-73.0
-70.0
-66.5
BER=10
-90.5
-88.0
-84.5
-81.5
-79.5
-77.0
-73.5
-71.0
-68.0
-64.5
BER=10-6
-91.5
-88.5
-85.0
-82.0
-80.0
-77.5
-74.0
-71.5
-68.5
-64.5
BER=10-10
-89.5
-86.5
-83.0
-80.0
-78.0
-75.5
-72.0
-69.5
-66.5
-62.5
BER=10
-91.5
-88.0
-84.5
-81.5
-79.5
-77.0
-73.5
-70.5
-67.5
-63.5
BER=10-10
-89.5
-86.0
-82.5
-79.5
-77.5
-75.0
-71.5
-68.5
-65.5
-61.5
BER=10-6
-90.0
-86.5
-83.0
-80.0
-78.0
-75.5
-72.0
-69.0
-66.0
-62.0
BER=10
-88.0
-84.5
-81.0
-78.0
-76.0
-73.5
-70.0
-67.0
-64.0
-60.0
BER=10-6
-88.5
-85.0
-81.5
-78.5
-77.0
-74.0
-71.0
-67.5
-65.0
-61.0
BER=10-10
-86.5
-83.0
-79.5
-76.5
-75.0
-72.0
-69.0
-65.5
-63.0
-59.0
BER=10
-88.0
-84.5
-81.0
-78.0
-76.5
-73.5
-70.5
-67.0
-64.5
-60.5
BER=10-10
-86.0
-82.5
-79.0
-76.0
-74.5
-71.5
-68.5
-65.0
-62.5
-58.5
BER=10-6
-87.0
-83.5
-80.0
-77.0
-75.0
-72.5
-69.5
-66.0
-63.5
-89.0
BER=10
-85.0
-81.5
-78.0
-75.0
-73.0
-70.5
-67.5
-64.0
-61.5
-57.0
BER=10-6
-86.0
-82.5
-79.0
-76.0
-74.0
-71.5
-68.5
-65.0
-62.5
-58.0
BER=10-10
BER=10-6
-10
-6
14
20
28
-10
-6
30
40
50
56
32
Physical Mode
-10
-84.0
-80.5
-77.0
-74.0
-72.0
-69.5
-66.5
-63.0
-60.5
-56.0
-6
-85.5
-82.0
-78.5
-75.5
-73.5
-71.0
-68.0
-64.5
-62.0
-57.5
-10
-83.5
-80.0
-76.5
-73.5
-71.5
-69.0
-66.0
-62.5
-60.0
-55.5
BER=10
BER=10
MN.00273.E - 004
Radio Nominal RSL

Threshold (dBm)
Channel bandwidth
MHz
7
10
4SQAM
4QAM
16SQAM
16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
512QAM
1KQAM
-94.5
-92.0
-88.5
-85.5
-83.5
-81.0
-77.5
-75.0
-72.0
-68.5
BER=10
-92.5
-90.0
-86.5
-83.5
-81.5
-79.0
-75.5
-73.0
-70.0
-66.5
BER=10-6
-93.5
-90.5
-87.0
-84.0
-82.0
-79.5
-76.0
-73.5
-70.5
-66.5
BER=10-10
-91.5
-88.5
-85.0
-82.0
-80.0
-77.5
-74.0
-71.5
-68.5
-64.5
BER=10
-93.5
-90.0
-86.5
-83.5
-81.5
-79.0
-75.5
-72.5
-69.5
-65.5
BER=10-10
-91.5
-88.0
-84.5
-81.5
-79.5
-77.0
-73.5
-70.5
-67.5
-63.5
BER=10-6
-92.0
-88.5
-85.0
-82.0
-80.0
-77.5
-74.0
-71.0
-68.0
-64.0
BER=10-10
BER=10-6
-10
-6
14
20
28
30
40
-90.0
-86.5
-83.0
-80.0
-78.0
-75.5
-72.0
-69.0
-66.0
-62.0
-6
-90.5
-87.0
-83.5
-80.5
-79.0
-76.0
-73.0
-69.5
-67.0
-63.0
-10
BER=10
-88.5
-85.0
-81.5
-78.5
-77.0
-74.0
-71.0
-67.5
-65.0
-61.0
BER=10-6
-90.0
-86.5
-83.0
-80.0
-78.5
-75.5
-72.5
-69.0
-66.5
-62.5
BER=10
-88.0
-84.5
-81.0
-78.0
-76.5
-73.5
-70.5
-67.0
-64.5
-60.5
BER=10-6
-89.0
-85.5
-82.0
-79.0
-77.0
-74.5
-71.5
-68.0
-65.5
-61.0
BER=10-10
-87.0
-83.5
-80.0
-77.0
-75.0
-72.5
-69.5
-66.0
-63.5
-59.0
BER=10
-88.0
-84.5
-81.0
-78.0
-76.0
-73.5
-70.5
-67.0
-64.5
-60.0
BER=10-10
-86.0
-82.5
-79.0
-76.0
-74.0
-71.5
-68.5
-65.0
-62.5
-58.0
BER=10-6
-87.5
-84.0
-80.5
-77.5
-75.5
-73.0
-70.0
-66.5
-64.0
-59.5
-85.5
-82.0
-78.5
-75.5
-73.5
-71.0
-68.0
-64.5
-62.0
-57.5
BER=10
-10
-6
50
56
23
GHz
Physical Mode
-10
BER=10

Threshold (dBm)
Channel bandwidth
MHz
7
10
4SQAM
4QAM
16SQAM
16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
512QAM
1KQAM
-92.5
-90.0
-86.5
-83.5
-81.5
-79.0
-75.5
-73.0
-70.0
-66.5
BER=10
-90.5
-88.0
-84.5
-81.5
-79.5
-77.0
-73.5
-71.0
-68.0
-64.5
BER=10-6
-91.5
-88.5
-85.0
-82.0
-80.0
-77.5
-74.0
-71.5
-68.5
-64.5
BER=10-10
-89.5
-86.5
-83.0
-80.0
-78.0
-75.5
-72.0
-69.5
-66.5
-62.5
BER=10
-91.5
-88.0
-84.5
-81.5
-79.5
-77.0
-73.5
-70.5
-67.5
-63.5
BER=10-10
-89.5
-86.0
-82.5
-79.5
-77.5
-75.0
-71.5
-68.5
-65.5
-61.5
BER=10-6
-90.0
-86.5
-83.0
-80.0
-78.0
-75.5
-72.0
-69.0
-66.0
-62.0
BER=10
-88.0
-84.5
-81.0
-78.0
-76.0
-73.5
-70.0
-67.0
-64.0
-60.0
BER=10-6
-88.5
-85.0
-81.5
-78.5
-77.0
-74.0
-71.0
-67.5
-65.0
-61.0
BER=10-10
-86.5
-83.0
-79.5
-76.5
-75.0
-72.0
-69.0
-65.5
-63.0
-59.0
BER=10
-88.0
-84.5
-81.0
-78.0
-76.5
-73.5
-70.5
-67.0
-64.5
-60.5
BER=10-10
-86.0
-82.5
-79.0
-76.0
-74.5
-71.5
-68.5
-65.0
-62.5
-58.5
BER=10-6
-87.0
-83.5
-80.0
-77.0
-75.0
-72.5
-69.5
-66.0
-63.5
-89.0
BER=10
-85.0
-81.5
-78.0
-75.0
-73.0
-70.5
-67.5
-64.0
-61.5
-57.0
BER=10-6
-86.0
-82.5
-79.0
-76.0
-74.0
-71.5
-68.5
-65.0
-62.5
-58.0
BER=10-10
BER=10-6
-10
-6
14
20
28
-10
-6
30
40
50
56
Physical Mode
-10
-84.0
-80.5
-77.0
-74.0
-72.0
-69.5
-66.5
-63.0
-60.5
-56.0
-6
-85.5
-82.0
-78.5
-75.5
-73.5
-71.0
-68.0
-64.5
-62.0
-57.5
-10
-83.5
-80.0
-76.5
-73.5
-71.5
-69.0
-66.0
-62.5
-60.0
-55.5
BER=10
BER=10
MN.00273.E - 004
33
Radio Nominal RSL

Threshold (dBm)
Channel bandwidth
MHz
7
14
4SQAM
4QAM
16SQAM
16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
512QAM
1KQAM
-93.0
-90.5
-87.0
-84.0
-82.0
-79.5
-76.0
-73.5
-70.5
-67.0
BER=10
-91.0
-88.5
-85.0
-82.0
-80.0
-77.5
-74.0
-71.5
-68.5
-65.0
BER=10-6
-92.0
-88.5
-85.0
-82.0
-80.0
-77.5
-74.0
-71.0
-68.0
-64.0
BER=10-10
-90.0
-86.5
-83.0
-80.0
-78.0
-75.5
-72.0
-69.0
-66.0
-62.0
BER=10
-89.0
-85.5
-82.0
-79.0
-77.5
-74.5
-71.5
-68.0
-65.5
-61.5
BER=10-10
-87.0
-83.5
-80.0
-77.0
-75.5
-72.5
-69.5
-66.0
-63.5
-59.5
BER=10-6
-86.0
-82.5
-79.0
-76.0
-74.0
-71.5
-68.5
-65.0
-62.5
-58.0
BER=10-10
-84.0
-80.5
-77.0
-74.0
-72.0
-69.5
-66.5
-63.0
-60.5
-56.0
BER=10-6
-10
-6
28
56
26
GHz
Physical Mode

Threshold (dBm)
Channel bandwidth
MHz
7
4SQAM
4QAM
16SQAM
16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
512QAM
1KQAM
BER=10-6
-91.0
-88.5
-85.0
-82.0
-80.0
-77.5
-74.0
-71.5
-68.5
-65.0
BER=10-10
-89.0
-86.5
-83.0
-80.0
-78.0
-75.5
-72.0
-69.5
-66.5
-63.0
BER=10
-90.0
-86.5
-83.0
-80.0
-78.0
-75.5
-72.0
-69.0
-66.0
-62.0
BER=10-10
-88.0
-84.5
-81.0
-78.0
-76.0
-73.5
-70.0
-67.0
-64.0
-60.0
BER=10-6
-87.0
-83.5
-80.0
-77.0
-75.5
-72.5
-69.5
-66.0
-63.5
-59.5
BER=10
-85.0
-81.5
-78.0
-75.0
-73.5
-70.5
-67.5
-64.0
-61.5
-57.5
BER=10-6
-84.0
-80.5
-77.0
-74.0
-72.0
-69.5
-66.5
-63.0
-60.5
-56.0
BER=10-10
-82.0
-78.5
-75.0
-72.0
-70.0
-67.5
-64.5
-61.0
-58.5
-54.0
-6
14
28
56
34
Physical Mode
-10
MN.00273.E - 004
Radio Nominal RSL

Threshold (dBm)
Channel bandwidth
MHz
7
14
4SQAM
4QAM
16SQAM
16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
512QAM
1KQAM
-93.5
-91.0
-87.5
-84.5
-82.5
-80.0
-76.5
-74.0
-71.0
-67.5
BER=10
-91.5
-89.0
-85.5
-82.5
-80.5
-78.0
-74.5
-72.0
-69.0
-65.5
BER=10-6
-92.5
-89.0
-85.5
-82.5
-80.5
-78.0
-74.5
-71.5
-68.5
-64.5
BER=10-10
-90.5
-87.0
-83.5
-80.5
-78.5
-76.0
-72.5
-69.5
-66.5
-62.5
BER=10
-89.5
-86.0
-82.5
-79.5
-78.0
-75.0
-72.0
-68.5
-66.0
-62.0
BER=10-10
-87.5
-84.0
-80.5
-77.5
-76.0
-73.0
-70.0
-66.5
-64.0
-60.0
BER=10-6
-86.5
-83.0
-79.5
-76.5
-74.5
-72.0
-69.0
-65.5
-63.0
-58.5
BER=10-10
-84.5
-81.0
-77.5
-74.5
-72.5
-70.0
-67.0
-63.5
-61.0
-56.5
BER=10-6
-10
-6
28
56
28
GHz
Physical Mode

Threshold (dBm)
Channel bandwidth
MHz
7
4SQAM
4QAM
16SQAM
16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
512QAM
1KQAM
BER=10-6
-91.5
-89.0
-85.5
-82.5
-80.5
-78.0
-74.5
-72.0
-69.0
-65.5
BER=10-10
-89.5
-87.0
-83.5
-80.5
-78.5
-76.0
-72.5
-70.0
-67.0
-63.5
BER=10
-90.5
-87.0
-83.5
-80.5
-78.5
-76.0
-72.5
-69.5
-66.5
-62.5
BER=10-10
-88.5
-85.0
-81.5
-78.5
-76.5
-74.0
-70.5
-67.5
-64.5
-60.5
BER=10-6
-87.5
-84.0
-80.5
-77.5
-76.0
-73.0
-70.0
-66.5
-64.0
-60.0
BER=10
-85.5
-82.0
-78.5
-75.5
-74.0
-71.0
-68.0
-64.5
-62.0
-58.0
BER=10-6
-84.5
-81.0
-77.5
-74.5
-72.5
-70.0
-67.0
-63.5
-61.0
-56.5
BER=10-10
-82.5
-79.0
-75.5
-72.5
-70.5
-68.0
-65.0
-61.5
-59.0
-54.5
-6
14
28
56
Physical Mode
-10
MN.00273.E - 004
35
Radio Nominal RSL

Threshold (dBm)
Channel bandwidth
MHz
7
10
4SQAM
4QAM
16SQAM
16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
512QAM
1KQAM
-92.0
-89.5
-86.0
-83.0
-81.0
-78.5
-75.0
-72.5
-69.5
-66.0
BER=10
-90.0
-87.5
-84.0
-81.0
-79.0
-76.5
-73.0
-70.5
-67.5
-64.0
BER=10-6
-91.0
-88.0
-84.5
-81.5
-79.5
-77.0
-73.5
-71.0
-68.0
-64.0
BER=10-10
-89.0
-86.0
-82.5
-79.5
-77.5
-75.0
-71.5
-69.0
-66.0
-62.0
BER=10
-91.0
-87.5
-84.0
-81.0
-79.0
-76.5
-73.0
-70.0
-67.0
-63.0
BER=10-10
-89.0
-85.5
-82.0
-79.0
-77.0
-74.5
-71.0
-68.0
-65.0
-61.0
BER=10-6
-89.5
-86.0
-82.5
-79.5
-77.5
-75.0
-71.5
-68.5
-65.5
-61.5
BER=10-10
BER=10-6
-10
-6
14
20
28
30
40
-87.5
-84.0
-80.5
-77.5
-75.5
-73.0
-69.5
-66.5
-63.5
-59.5
-6
-88.0
-84.5
-81.0
-78.0
-76.5
-73.5
-70.5
-67.0
-64.5
-60.5
-10
BER=10
-86.0
-82.5
-79.0
-76.0
-74.5
-71.5
-68.5
-65.0
-62.5
-58.5
BER=10-6
-87.5
-84.0
-80.5
-77.5
-76.0
-73.0
-70.0
-66.5
-64.0
-60.0
BER=10
-85.5
-82.0
-78.5
-75.5
-74.0
-71.0
-68.0
-64.5
-62.0
-58.0
BER=10-6
-86.5
-83.0
-79.5
-76.5
-74.5
-72.0
-69.0
-65.5
-63.0
-58.5
BER=10-10
-84.5
-81.0
-77.5
-74.5
-72.5
-70.0
-67.0
-63.5
-61.0
-56.5
BER=10
-85.5
-82.0
-78.5
-75.5
-73.5
-71.0
-68.0
-64.5
-62.0
-57.5
BER=10-10
-83.5
-80.0
-76.5
-73.5
-71.5
-69.0
-66.0
-62.5
-60.0
-55.5
BER=10-6
-85.0
-81.5
-78.0
-75.0
-73.0
-70.5
-67.5
-64.0
-61.5
-57.0
-83.0
-79.5
-76.0
-73.0
-71.0
-68.5
-65.5
-62.0
-59.5
-55.0
BER=10
-10
-6
50
56
32
GHz
Physical Mode
-10
BER=10

Threshold (dBm)
Channel bandwidth
MHz
7
10
4SQAM
4QAM
16SQAM
16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
512QAM
1KQAM
-90.0
-87.5
-84.0
-81.0
-79.0
-76.5
-73.0
-70.5
-67.5
-64.0
BER=10
-88.0
-85.5
-82.0
-79.0
-77.0
-74.5
-71.0
-68.5
-65.5
-62.0
BER=10-6
-89.0
-86.0
-82.5
-79.5
-77.5
-75.0
-71.5
-69.0
-66.0
-62.0
BER=10-10
-87.0
-84.0
-80.5
-77.5
-75.5
-73.0
-69.5
-67.0
-64.0
-60.0
BER=10
-89.0
-85.5
-82.0
-79.0
-77.0
-74.5
-71.0
-68.0
-65.0
-61.0
BER=10-10
-87.0
-83.5
-80.0
-77.0
-75.0
-72.5
-69.0
-66.0
-63.0
-59.0
BER=10-6
-87.5
-84.0
-80.5
-77.5
-75.5
-73.5
-69.5
-66.5
-63.5
-59.5
BER=10
-85.5
-82.0
-78.5
-75.5
-73.5
-71.0
-67.5
-64.5
-61.5
-57.5
BER=10-6
-86.0
-82.5
-79.0
-76.0
-74.5
-71.5
-68.5
-65.0
-62.5
-58.5
BER=10-10
-84.0
-80.5
-77.0
-74.0
-72.5
-69.5
-66.5
-63.0
-60.5
-56.5
BER=10
-85.5
-82.0
-78.5
-75.5
-74.0
-71.0
-68.0
-64.5
-62.0
-58.0
BER=10-10
-83.5
-80.0
-76.5
-73.5
-72.0
-69.0
-66.0
-62.5
-60.0
-56.0
BER=10-6
-84.5
-81.0
-77.5
-74.5
-72.5
-70.0
-67.0
-63.5
-61.0
-56.5
BER=10
-82.5
-79.0
-75.5
-72.5
-70.5
-68.0
-65.0
-61.5
-59.0
-54.5
BER=10-6
-83.5
-80.0
-76.5
-73.5
-71.5
-69.0
-66.0
-62.5
-60.0
-55.5
BER=10-10
BER=10-6
-10
-6
14
20
28
-10
-6
30
40
50
56
36
Physical Mode
-10
-81.5
-78.0
-74.5
-71.5
-69.5
-67.0
-64.0
-60.5
-58.0
-53.5
-6
-83.0
-79.5
-76.0
-73.0
-71.0
-68.5
-65.5
-62.0
-59.5
-55.0
-10
-81.0
-77.5
-74.0
-71.0
-69.0
-66.5
-63.5
-60.0
-57.5
-53.0
BER=10
BER=10
MN.00273.E - 004
Radio Nominal RSL

Threshold (dBm)
Channel bandwidth
MHz
7
10
4SQAM
4QAM
16SQAM
16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
512QAM
1KQAM
-92.5
-90.0
-86.5
-83.5
-81.5
-79.0
-75.5
-73.0
-70.0
-66.5
BER=10
-90.5
-88.0
-84.5
-81.5
-79.5
-77.0
-73.5
-71.0
-68.0
-64.5
BER=10-6
-91.5
-88.5
-85.0
-82.0
-80.0
-77.5
-74.0
-71.5
-68.5
-64.5
BER=10-10
-89.5
-86.5
-83.0
-80.0
-78.0
-75.5
-72.0
-69.5
-66.5
-62.5
BER=10
-91.5
-88.0
-84.5
-81.5
-79.5
-77.0
-73.5
-70.5
-67.5
-63.5
BER=10-10
-89.5
-86.0
-82.5
-79.5
-77.5
-75.0
-71.5
-68.5
-65.5
-61.5
BER=10-6
-90.0
-86.5
-83.0
-80.0
-78.0
-75.5
-72.0
-69.0
-66.0
-62.0
BER=10-10
BER=10-6
-10
-6
14
20
28
30
40
-88.0
-84.5
-81.0
-78.0
-76.0
-73.5
-70.0
-67.0
-64.0
-60.0
-6
-88.5
-85.0
-81.5
-78.5
-77.0
-74.0
-71.0
-67.5
-65.0
-61.0
-10
BER=10
-86.5
-83.0
-79.5
-76.5
-75.0
-72.0
-69.0
-65.5
-63.0
-59.0
BER=10-6
-88.0
-84.5
-81.0
-78.0
-76.5
-73.5
-70.5
-67.0
-64.5
-60.5
BER=10
-86.0
-82.5
-79.0
-76.0
-74.5
-71.5
-68.5
-65.0
-62.5
-58.5
BER=10-6
-87.0
-83.5
-80.0
-77.0
-75.0
-72.5
-69.5
-66.0
-63.5
-59.0
BER=10-10
-85.0
-81.5
-78.0
-75.0
-73.0
-70.5
-67.5
-64.0
-61.5
-57.0
BER=10
-86.0
-82.5
-79.0
-76.0
-74.0
-71.5
-68.5
-65.0
-62.5
-58.0
BER=10-10
-84.0
-80.5
-77.0
-74.0
-72.0
-69.5
-66.5
-63.0
-60.5
-56.0
BER=10-6
-85.5
-82.0
-78.5
-75.5
-73.5
-71.0
-68.0
-64.5
-62.0
-57.5
-83.5
-80.0
-76.5
-73.5
-71.5
-69.0
-66.0
-62.5
-60.0
-55.5
BER=10
-10
-6
50
56
38
GHz
Physical Mode
-10
BER=10

Threshold (dBm)
Channel bandwidth
MHz
7
10
4SQAM
4QAM
16SQAM
16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
512QAM
1KQAM
-90.5
-88.0
-84.5
-81.5
-79.5
-77.5
-73.5
-71.0
-68.0
-64.5
BER=10
-88.5
-86.0
-82.5
-79.5
-77.5
-75.0
-71.5
-69.0
-66.0
-62.5
BER=10-6
-89.5
-86.5
-83.0
-80.0
-78.0
-75.5
-72.0
-69.5
-66.5
-62.5
BER=10-10
-87.5
-84.5
-81.0
-78.0
-76.0
-73.5
-70.0
-67.5
-64.5
-60.5
BER=10
-89.5
-86.0
-82.5
-79.5
-77.5
-75.0
-71.5
-68.5
-65.5
-61.5
BER=10-10
-87.5
-84.0
-80.5
-77.5
-75.5
-73.0
-69.5
-66.5
-63.5
-59.5
BER=10-6
-88.0
-84.5
-81.0
-78.0
-76.0
-73.5
-70.0
-67.0
-64.0
-60.0
BER=10
-86.0
-82.5
-79.0
-76.0
-74.0
-71.5
-68.0
-65.0
-62.0
-58.0
BER=10-6
-86.5
-83.0
-79.5
-76.5
-75.0
-72.0
-69.0
-65.5
-63.0
-59.0
BER=10-10
-84.5
-81.0
-77.5
-74.5
-73.0
-70.0
-67.0
-63.5
-61.0
-57.0
BER=10
-86.0
-82.5
-79.0
-76.0
-74.5
-71.5
-68.5
-65.0
-62.5
-58.5
BER=10-10
-84.0
-80.5
-77.0
-74.0
-72.5
-69.5
-66.5
-63.0
-60.5
-56.5
BER=10-6
-85.0
-81.5
-78.0
-75.0
-73.0
-70.5
-67.5
-64.0
-61.5
-57.0
BER=10
-83.0
-79.5
-76.0
-73.0
-71.0
-68.5
-65.5
-62.0
-59.5
-55.0
BER=10-6
-84.0
-80.5
-77.0
-74.0
-72.0
-69.5
-66.5
-63.0
-60.5
-56.0
BER=10-10
BER=10-6
-10
-6
14
20
28
-10
-6
30
40
50
56
Physical Mode
-10
-82.0
-78.5
-75.0
-72.0
-70.0
-67.5
-64.5
-61.0
-58.5
-54.0
-6
-83.5
-80.0
-76.5
-73.5
-71.5
-69.0
-66.0
-62.5
-60.0
-55.5
-10
-81.5
-78.0
-74.5
-71.5
-69.5
-67.0
-64.0
-60.5
-58.0
-53.5
BER=10
BER=10
MN.00273.E - 004
37
Radio Nominal RSL

Threshold (dBm)
Channel bandwidth
MHz
4SQAM
4QAM
16SQAM
16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
512QAM
1KQAM
-91.5
-89.0
-85.5
-82.5
-80.5
-78.0
-74.5
-72.0
-69.0
-65.5
BER=10
-89.5
-87.0
-83.5
-80.5
-78.5
-76.0
-72.5
-70.0
-67.0
-63.5
BER=10-6
-90.5
-87.0
-83.5
-80.5
-78.5
-76.0
-72.5
-69.5
-66.5
-62.5
BER=10-10
-88.5
-85.0
-81.5
-78.5
-76.5
-74.0
-70.5
-67.5
-64.5
-60.5
BER=10
-87.5
-84.0
-80.5
-77.5
-76.0
-73.0
-70.0
-66.5
-64.0
-60.0
BER=10-10
-85.5
-82.0
-78.5
-75.5
-74.0
-71.0
-68.0
-64.5
-62.0
-58.0
BER=10-6
-84.5
-81.0
-77.5
-74.5
-72.5
-70.0
-67.0
-63.5
-61.0
-56.5
BER=10-10
-82.5
-79.0
-75.5
-72.5
-70.5
-68.0
-65.0
-61.5
-59.0
-54.5
BER=10-6
-10
14
-6
28
56
42
GHz
Physical Mode

Threshold (dBm)
Channel bandwidth
MHz
7
4SQAM
4QAM
16SQAM
16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
512QAM
1KQAM
BER=10-6
-89.5
-87.0
-83.5
-80.5
-78.5
-76.0
-72.5
-70.0
-67.0
-63.5
BER=10-10
-87.5
-85.0
-81.5
78.5
76.5
-74.0
-70.5
-68.0
-65.0
-61.5
BER=10
-88.5
-85.0
-81.5
-78.5
-76.5
-74.0
-70.5
-67.5
-64.5
-60.5
BER=10-10
-86.5
-83.0
-79.5
-76.5
-74.5
-72.0
-68.5
-65.5
-62.5
-58.5
BER=10-6
-85.5
-82.0
-78.5
-75.5
-74.0
-71.0
-68.0
-64.5
-62.0
-58.0
BER=10
-83.5
-80.0
-76.5
-73.5
-72.0
-69.0
-66.0
-62.5
-60.0
-56.0
BER=10-6
-82.5
-79.0
-75.5
-72.5
-70.5
-68.0
-65.0
-61.5
-59.0
54.5
BER=10-10
-80.5
-77.0
-73.5
-70.5
-68.5
-66.0
-63.0
-59.5
-57.0
-52.5
-6
14
28
-10
56
Physical Mode
Modulation
4QAM up to 1024QAM
Number of settable RF channel
depending on RF band and capacity
Tuning frequency step
250 KHz
Tx/Rx frequency spacing
see Tab.3
Noise figure
see Tab.5
Tab.5 - Noise figure
38
Frequency Band (GHz)
Noise Figure (dB)
11
6.5
13
6.5
15
6.5
17
18
23
26
8.5
MN.00273.E - 004
Frequency Band (GHz)
Noise Figure (dB)
28
32
9.5
38
42
10
Link ID
identifier RFOH: 1 to 255
Loop facility
Baseband loop, RF loop (only for GB8xxxx)
Spurious emissions/rejection
according to ETSI
Max RSL threshold

-
without degradation
-25dBm
without distortion
-22dBm
without permanent damage
-10dBm
6.2.1
Adaptive modulation
ALFOplus ODUs implement an error free adaptive modulation algorithm to improve the system gain when
the quality of the received signal become insufficient to guarantee an error free link.
The thresholds for ACM are shown in the Tab.6.
Tab.6 - ACM switching thresholds
7M Physical Mode
Power
(Estim.)
BER 10-6
(Estim.)
4SQAM
6.4
4QAM
8.2
11.2
17.7
20.2
5.0
16SQAM
-2.5
12.7
15.7
19.6
19.6
7.5
16QAM
-2.5
14.6
17.6
22.2
23.5
5.0
32QAM
-3.75
17.2
20.2
24.7
24.5
6.3
64QAM
-3.5
19.7
22.7
27.8
27.8
4.8
128QAM
-3.5
22.8
25.8
31
31.6
5.0
256QAM
-4.125
26
29
34.1
34.1
5.6
512QAM
-4.25
29.1
32.1
36.8
36.8
5.1
1KQAM
-4.25
32.3
35.3
10M Physical Mode
Power
(Estim.)
BER 10-6
(Estim.)
Down-shift
(Estim.)
Margin
(Estim.)
Up-shift
(Estim.)
Margin
(Estim.)
Up-shift
(Estim.)
4SQAM
6.4
13.2
13.2
4QAM
8.2
11.2
17.7
20.2
5.0
16SQAM
-2.5
12.7
15.7
19.6
19.6
7.5
16QAM
-2.5
14.6
17.6
22.2
23.54
5.0
32QAM
-3.75
17.2
20.2
24.7
24.5
6.3
MN.00273.E - 004
Down-shift
(Estim.)
Margin
(Estim.)
Up-shift
(Estim.)
Margin
(Estim.)
13.2
Up-shift
(Estim.)
Margin
(Estim.)
13.2
4.5
4.5
Margin
(Estim.)
39
64QAM
-3.5
19.7
22.7
27.8
27.8
4.8
128QAM
-3.5
22.8
25.8
31
31.6
5.0
256QAM
-4.125
26
29
34.1
34.1
5.6
512QAM
-4.25
29.1
32.1
36.8
36.8
5.1
1KQAM
-4.25
32.3
35.3
4.5
14M Physical Mode
Power
(Estim.)
BER 10-6
(Estim.)
Down-shift
(Estim.)
Margin
(Estim.)
Up-shift
(Estim.)
Margin
(Estim.)
4SQAM
5.8
4QAM
8.2
11.2
17.6
5.0
20.1
5.0
16SQAM
-2.5
12.6
15.6
19.5
5.0
19.5
7.5
16QAM
-2.5
14.5
17.5
22
5.0
23.3
5.0
32QAM
-3.75
17
20
25.7
5.0
25.5
6.3
64QAM
-3.5
19.7
23.2
27.7
6.0
27.7
5.8
128QAM
-3.5
22.7
25.7
30.8
5.0
31.4
5.0
256QAM
-4.125
25.8
28.8
33.9
5.0
33.9
5.6
512QAM
-4.25
28.9
31.9
36.7
5.0
36.7
5.1
1KQAM
-4.25
32.2
35.2
20M Physical Mode
Power
(Estim.)
BER 10-6
(Estim.)
Down-shift
(Estim.)
Margin
(Estim.)
4SQAM
5.7
4QAM
8.2
10.7
2.5
17.1
4.5
19.6
4.5
16SQAM
-2.5
12.6
15.1
2.5
18.9
4.5
18.9
7.0
16QAM
-2.5
14.4
16.9
2.5
21.3
4.5
22.6
4.5
32QAM
-3.75
16.8
19.3
2.5
25.6
4.5
25.4
5.8
64QAM
-3.5
19.6
23.1
3,5
27.2
27.2
5.8
128QAM
-3.5
22.7
25.2
2.5
30.2
4.5
30.8
4.5
256QAM
-4.125
25.7
28.2
2.5
33.3
4.5
33.3
5.1
512QAM
-4.25
28.8
31.3
2.5
36.5
4.5
36.5
4.6
1KQAM
-4.25
320
34.5
2.5
28M Physical Mode
Power
(Estim.)
BER 10-6
(Estim.)
Down-shift
(Estim.)
Margin
(Estim.)
4SQAM
5.7
4QAM
8.2
10.7
2.5
17.1
4.5
19.6
4.5
16SQAM
-2.5
12.6
15.1
2.5
18.9
4.5
18.9
7.0
16QAM
-2.5
14.4
16.9
2.5
21.3
4.5
22.6
4.5
32QAM
-3.75
16.8
19.3
2.5
25.6
4.5
25.4
5.8
64QAM
-3.5
19.6
23.1
3,5
27.2
6.0
27.2
5.8
128QAM
-3.5
22.7
25.2
2.5
30.2
4.5
30.8
4.5
256QAM
-4.125
25.7
28.2
2.5
33.3
4.5
33.3
5.1
40
13.2
4.5
Up-shift
(Estim.)
13.2
4.5
Up-shift
(Estim.)
Margin
(Estim.)
12.7
4.5
Up-shift
(Estim.)
Margin
(Estim.)
12.7
4.5
Up-shift
(Estim.)
Margin
(Estim.)
Margin
(Estim.)
12.7
4.5
Up-shift
(Estim.)
Margin
(Estim.)
12.7
MN.00273.E - 004
512QAM
-4.25
28.8
31.3
2.5
1KQAM
-4.25
32
34.5
2.5
30M Physical Mode
Power
(Estim.)
BER 10-6
(Estim.)
Down-shift
(Estim.)
Margin
(Estim.)
4SQAM
5.7
4QAM
8.2
10.7
2.5
17.1
4.5
19.6
4.5
16SQAM
-2.5
12.6
15.1
2.5
18.9
4.5
18.9
7.0
16QAM
-2.5
14.4
16.9
2.5
21.3
4.5
22.6
4.5
32QAM
-3.75
16.8
19.3
2.5
25.6
4.5
25.4
5.8
64QAM
-3.5
19.6
23.1
3,5
27.2
6.0
27.2
5.8
128QAM
-3.5
22.7
25.2
2.5
30.2
4.5
30.8
4.5
256QAM
-4.125
25.7
28.2
2.5
33.3
4.5
33.3
5.1
512QAM
-4.25
28.8
31.3
2.5
36.5
4.5
36.5
4.6
1KQAM
-4.25
32
34.5
2.5
40M Physical Mode
Power
(Estim.)
BER 10-6
(Estim.)
Down-shift
(Estim.)
Margin
(Estim.)
4SQAM
5.7
4QAM
8.2
10.7
2.5
17.1
4.5
19.6
4.5
16SQAM
-2.5
12.6
15.1
2.5
18.9
4.5
18.9
7.0
16QAM
-2.5
14.4
16.9
2.5
21.3
4.5
22.6
4.5
32QAM
-3.75
16.8
19.3
2.5
24.6
4.5
24.4
5.8
64QAM
-3.5
19.6
22.6
3.0
27.2
5.0
27.2
4.8
128QAM
-3.5
22.7
25.2
2.5
30.2
4.5
30.8
4.5
256QAM
-4.125
25.7
28.2
2.5
33.3
4.5
33.3
5.1
512QAM
-4.25
28.8
31.3
2.5
36.5
4.5
36.5
4.6
1KQAM
-4.25
32
34.5
2.5
50M Physical Mode
Power
(Estim.)
BER 10-6
(Estim.)
Down-shift
(Estim.)
Margin
(Estim.)
4SQAM
5.7
4QAM
8.2
10.7
2.5
17.1
4.5
19.6
4.5
16SQAM
-2.5
12.6
15.1
2.5
18.9
4.5
18.9
7.0
16QAM
-2.5
14.4
16.9
2.5
21.3
4.5
22.6
4.5
32QAM
-3.75
16.8
19.3
2.5
24.6
4.5
24.4
5.8
64QAM
-3.5
19.6
22.6
3.0
27.2
5.0
27.2
4.8
128QAM
-3.5
22.7
25.2
2.5
30.2
4.5
30.8
4.5
256QAM
-4.125
25.7
28.2
2.5
33.3
4.5
33.3
5.1
512QAM
-4.25
28.8
31.3
2.5
36.5
4.5
36.5
4.6
1KQAM
-4.25
32
34.5
2.5
MN.00273.E - 004
36.5
4.5
36.5
4.5
Up-shift
(Estim.)
Margin
(Estim.)
12.7
4.5
Up-shift
(Estim.)
Margin
(Estim.)
12.7
4.5
Up-shift
(Estim.)
Margin
(Estim.)
12.7
4.5
Up-shift
(Estim.)
Margin
(Estim.)
12.7
4.5
Up-shift
(Estim.)
4.6
Margin
(Estim.)
12.7
4.5
Up-shift
(Estim.)
Margin
(Estim.)
12.7
4.5
4.5
41
56M Physical Mode
Power
(Estim.)
BER 10-6
(Estim.)
4SQAM
5.7
4QAM
8.2
10.7
2.5
17.1
4.5
19.6
4.5
16SQAM
-2.5
12.6
15.1
2.5
18.9
4.5
18.9
7.0
16QAM
-2.5
14.4
16.9
2.5
21.3
4.5
22.6
4.5
32QAM
-3.75
16.8
19.3
2.5
24.6
4.5
24.4
5.8
64QAM
-3.5
19.6
22.6
27.2
5.0
27.2
4.8
128QAM
-3.5
22.7
25.2
2.5
30.2
4.5
30.8
4.5
256QAM
-4.125
25.7
28.2
2.5
33.3
4.5
33.3
5.1
512QAM
-4.125
28.8
31.3
2.5
36.5
4.5
36.5
4.6
1KQAM
-5.0
32
34.5
2.5
6.3
Down-shift
(Estim.)
Margin
(Estim.)
Up-shift
(Estim.)
Margin
(Estim.)
12.7
Up-shift
(Estim.)
Margin
(Estim.)
12.7
4.5
4.5
LINE INTERFACE CHARACTERISTICS
Ethernet interface
All ports can be transmitters or sources of the synchronism through Synchronous Ethernet.
42
Ethernet connectors
IEEE 802.3 10/100/1000BaseT RJ45

IEEE 802.3 100/1000BaseX LC
Ethernet switch functionality
MAC Switching, Learning and Ageing

Jumbo frame up to 10 kbytes
IEEE 802.3af PoE-Power Over Ethernet
IEEE 802.1Q VLAN
IEEE 802.1ad QinQ-VLAN Stacking
VLAN rewriting (Radio side)
Link Loss Forwarding (LLF)
IEEE 802.3x Flow Control
IEEE 802.1p QoS/DSCP
IEEE 802.1w RSTP-Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
ELP (Ethernet Line Protection)
IEEE 802.3ad LACP-Link Aggregation Control Protocol or Link
Aggregation
IEEE 802.1ag OAM-Operation, Administration and Maintenance
G.8264 SyncE Quality Management (SSM)
Hard limiting or WRED (Software selectable)
Enhanced Ethernet Prioritization based on MPLS ExpBits
Ethernet frame fragmentation (radio side)
Selective QinQ based on VLAN and 802.1p priority
CIR/EIR rate Management, based on outer Tag or input priority
(radio side)
Multi Layer Packet Compression (up to 128kbytes-configurable
radio side)
Advanced statistics monitoring based on VLAN and priority
Ethernet performance monitoring-RMON
Security management (SSH, SFTP) on network element and
NMS5UX
Ethernet latency
see Tab.7
MN.00273.E - 004
Tab.7 - Guaranteed Ethernet Latency (ms) for ALFOplus

One way delay (msec)
Packet size 64 bytes
Channel size (MHz)
4QAM
16SQAM
16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
512QAM
1K QAM
1.100
1.083
1.069
1.064
1.060
1.056
1.054
1.051
1.049
10
0.925
0.914
0.904
0.900
0.897
0.894
0.893
0.980
0.889
14
0.649
0.641
0.634
0.632
0.629
0.627
0.626
0.625
0.624
20
0.464
0.459
0.453
0.451
0.450
0.449
0.448
0.447
0.447
28
0.329
0.325
0.321
0.320
0.319
0.318
0.318
0.317
0316
30
0.311
0.306
0.304
0.303
0.302
0.302
0.300
0.300
0.299
40
0.237
0.233
0.232
0.231
0.230
0.230
0.229
0.229
0.228
50
0.193
0.190
0.188
0.188
0.186
0.186
0.186
0.186
0.186
56
0.170
0.168
0.166
0.166
0.165
0.164
0.164
0.164
0.163
Channel size (MHz)
4QAM
16SQAM
16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
512QAM
1K QAM
1.148
1.120
1.095
1.088
1.078
1.071
1.068
1.063
1.060
10
0.960
0.940
0.922
0.916
0.909
0.905
0.903
0.900
0.898
14
0.674
0.660
0.648
0.644
0.639
0.636
0.634
0.632
0.630
20
0.483
0.473
0.464
0.461
0.458
0.456
0.455
0.453
0.451
28
0.342
0.335
0.329
0.327
0.324
0.323
0.322
0.321
0.321
30
0.323
0.293
0.289
0.283
0.285
0.283
0.282
0.282
0.303
40
0.266
0.241
0.238
0.233
0.235
0.233
0.232
0.232
0.231
50
0.201
0.197
0.193
0.192
0.191
0.190
0.190
0.189
0.188
56
0.177
0.174
0.171
0.169
0.169
0.168
0.167
0.167
0.167
Channel size (MHz)
4QAM
16SQAM
16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
512QAM
1K QAM
1.247
1.194
1.146
1.132
1.114
1.101
1.095
1.087
1.081
10
1.030
0.993
0.960
0.950
0.937
0.929
0.925
0.919
0.913
14
0.723
0.697
0.674
0.666
0.658
0.652
0.649
0.645
0.641
20
0.517
0.499
0.482
0.478
0.472
0.467
0.466
0.463
0.456
28
0.367
0.354
0.342
0.339
0.335
0.332
0.331
0.329
0.327
30
0.347
0.330
0.324
0.321
0.317
0.313
0.303
0.310
0.309
40
0.266
0.253
0.248
0.246
0.243
0.240
0.232
0.238
0.237
50
0.216
0.209
0.203
0.200
0.198
0.196
0.196
0.195
0.193
56
0.191
0.185
0.179
0.177
0.175
0.173
0.172
0.172
0.171
Channel size (MHz)
4QAM
16SQAM
16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
512QAM
1K QAM
1.438
1.338
1.247
1.218
1.185
1.163
1.151
1.133
1.124
MN.00273.E - 004
43
10
1.167
1.096
1.032
1.013
0.989
0.973
0.965
0.952
0.944
14
0.820
0.770
0.725
0.712
0.695
0.684
0.678
0.669
0.664
20
0.587
0.553
0.521
0.511
0.499
0.492
0.488
0.482
0.478
28
0.418
0.393
0.371
0.364
0.356
0.350
0.347
0.343
0.341
30
0.394
0.364
0.351
0.343
0.336
0.330
0.328
0.325
0.323
40
0.303
0.280
0.270
0.264
0.258
0.254
0.252
0.250
0.247
50
0.246
0.233
0.220
0.216
0.212
0.209
0.207
0.205
0.203
56
0.218
0.206
0.195
0.191
0.187
0.185
0.183
0.181
0.179
Channel size (MHz)
4QAM
16SQAM
16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
512QAM
1K QAM
1.824
1.628
1.450
1.395
1.329
1.284
1.261
1.228
1.208
10
1.443
1.305
1.181
1.143
1.096
1.065
1.049
1.026
1.007
14
1.014
0.917
0.830
0.803
0.770
0.748
0.737
0.721
0.711
20
0.726
0.658
0.597
0.579
0.556
0.540
0.532
0.521
0.513
28
0.519
0.470
0.426
0.414
0.397
0.386
0.380
0.372
0.368
30
0.489
0.432
0.405
0.392
0.377
0.368
0.360
0.363
0.348
40
0.376
0.332
0.311
0.301
0.290
0.283
0.277
0.279
0.269
50
0.307
0.280
0.256
0.248
0.239
0.233
0.229
0.225
0.221
56
0.272
0.248
0.227
0.220
0.212
0.206
0.203
0.200
0.197
Channel size (MHz)
4QAM
16SQAM
16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
512QAM
1K QAM
2.193
1.905
1.644
1.562
1.466
1.400
1.367
0.001
1.289
10
1.707
1.505
1.322
1.265
1.197
1.151
1.127
1.092
1.066
14
1.200
1.058
0.929
0.890
0.842
0.809
0.792
0.768
0.754
20
0.860
0.761
0.671
0.643
0.609
0.588
0.576
0.559
0.545
28
0.615
0.544
0.480
0.460
0.436
0.420
0.412
0.399
0.393
30
0.580
0.499
0.460
0.441
0.419
0.403
0.393
0.385
0.372
40
0.433
0.381
0.351
0.337
0.320
0.308
0.300
0.294
0.289
50
0.365
0.325
0.288
0.277
0.264
0.255
0.250
0.246
0.239
56
0.324
0.289
0.257
0.247
0.235
0.227
0.223
0.219
0.214
Channel size (MHz)
4QAM
16SQAM
16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
512QAM
1K QAM
8.570
6.698
5.001
4.471
3.844
3.417
3.196
2.874
2.692
10
6.271
4.959
3.769
3.399
2.958
2.659
2.505
2.280
2.101
14
4.418
3.493
2.655
2.394
2.084
1.873
1.764
1.606
1.516
20
3.171
2.532
1.953
1.773
1.559
1.414
1.338
1.228
1.123
44
MN.00273.E - 004
28
2.284
1.824
1.407
1.277
1.123
1.018
0.964
0.885
0.840
30
2.155
1.608
1.352
1.234
1.093
0.996
0.928
0.875
0.801
40
1.670
1.246
1.048
0.956
0.847
0.772
0.719
0.678
0.646
50
1.371
1.114
0.881
0.809
0.722
0.664
0.634
0.590
0.552
56
1.227
0.997
0.789
0.724
0.646
0.594
0.567
0.528
0.505
Guaranteed Ethernet throughput
see Tab.8
Tab.8 - Guaranteed Ethernet Throughput (Mbit/s) for ALFOplus without Ethernet compression
Radio Net Throughput (Mbps)
Channel spacing
4SQAM
4QAM
16SQAM
16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
512QAM
1K QAM
7 MHz
9.295
10.872
16.225
21.080
24.483
30.293
36.102
41.912
47.763
53.572
10 MHz
11.408
15.328
22.875
29.720
34.517
42.707
50.898
29.088
67.279
75.469
14 MHz
16.393
22.025
32.870
42.705
49.599
61.368
73.137
84.906
96.756
108.529
20 MHz
23.231
31.213
46.581
60.520
70.289
86.968
103.647
120.326
137.004
153.683
28 MHz
32.956
44.279
66.081
85.854
99.713
123.373
147.034
170.694
194.524
218.185
30 MHz
35.117
47.183
70.414
91.484
106.251
131.463
156.675
181.887
207.100
232.312
40 MHz
46.462
62.426
93.163
121.040
140.578
173.936
207.294
240.651
274.009
307.366
50 MHz
58.078
78.033
116.454
151.300
175.723
217.420
259.117
300.814
342.511
384.208
56 MHz
65.912
88.558
132.161
171.708
199.425
246.746
294.068
341.389
389.048
436.369
MN.00273.E - 004
45
6.3.1
Ethernet optical interface characteristics
The optical interface can be specialized for the different applications by insertion of the proper transceiver
on the unit.
Tab.9 - Interface characteristics
Gigabit
Parameter
Single Mode
100 Mbit/s
Multi Mode
9/125 m
50/125 m
Multi Mode
62.5/125 m
50/125 m
62.5/125 m
Operating Distance
up to 10km
up to 550m
up to 2km
Optical Center Wavelength
1310 nm
850 nm
1310 nm
Optical Transmit Power
-3 -9.5 dBm
-2 -9.5 dBm
-14 -22 dBm
Receive Sensitivity
-19 dBm
-17 dBm
-29 dBm
Average Receive Power

Max
-3 dBm
0 dBm
-14 dBm
Link Power Budget
9.5 dB
7.5 dB
7 dB
Compliance
1000BaseLX
IEEE 802.3z
1000BaseSX
IEEE 802.3z
1000BaseFX IEEE 802.3z

100BaseFx IEEE 802.3z
Transceiver Type
Pluggable
Connectors Type
LC
6.4
POWER SUPPLY AND CABLE
ALFOplus unit is compatible with standard POE + IEEE 802.at (with exceeding maximum power). Power
supply can be provided at the LAN1 (ALFOplus GE) or LAN2 (ALFOplus GO).
In case of external PoE injector, verify that it has overcurrent protection. Power supply can be provided at
the LAN interface or at an auxiliary separated connector at the same time. The maximum length of CAT5e
cable (that carries data+PoE) is 100m.
-
Operating voltage range

Power consumption
48Vdc 15%
see Tab.10
Tab.10 - Power consumption (W)
Power consumption (W)
46
Frequency band
Typical
Guaranteed
t.b.d.
t.b.d.
37
39
37
39
11
35
37
Power consumption with negligible cable length.
MN.00273.E - 004
Power consumption (W)

Frequency band
Typical
Guaranteed
13
37
39
15
37
39
17
37
39
18
33.5
35
23
33.5
35
26
t.b.d.
t.b.d.
32
t.b.d.
t.b.d.
38
34
36
42
t.b.d.
t.b.d.
In any case, for other different needs, a dedicated auxiliary port (5 pin connector) provides power supply
48Volt (see Fig.56). For installation, please use rugged and waterproof cable.
6.4.1
PoE injector
Tab.11 - PoE injector supported
6.4.1.1
Code
Description
S03653
AC/DC 60W PoE injector
S03654
DC/DC 75W PoE injector
PoE injector functionality
The equipment presented in this paragraph is a SIAE IDU that provides power to the ODU ALFOplus
through the LAN cable.
SIAE Passive PoE Injector is a complete power management hot-swap with alarm indicators (over-current
protection, excess-voltage and under-voltage lockout). The Ethernet traffic from DATA connector (input)
is overlaid with power supply 48Volt into DATA&Power connector (Output). Below the details:
MN.00273.E - 004
47
Fig.11 - C60507 (48Vin 2 ports PoE injector)
Fig.12 - C60506 (48Vin 4 ports PoE injector)
6.4.1.2
Code table
Tab.12 - Code Table
48
Description
Code
48 Vin 1 ports PoE injector
C60507
48Vin 4 ports PoE injector
C60506
MN.00273.E - 004
6.4.1.3
Electrical characteristics
Tab.13 - Electrical characteristics
6.4.1.4
Vin
36..72Vdc (floating/pos. GND)
Iin (without ODU)
60mA (C60507), 120mA (C60506)
Alarm cable open on
Iout=50mA 20%
Alarm cable open off
Iout=70mA 20%
Iout MAX (per port)
1.45A 10%
Inrush current
ETS 300 132-2 mask compliant
Surge protection
IEC 1000-4-5 Level 4 4KV compliant
Connectors
Tab.14 - Connectors
6.4.1.5
Power supply
3 contacts plug P.3.81
ODU
RJ45
Default polarity RJ45
V+(4.5)
V-(7.8)
Optional polarity RJ45
V+(3.6)
V-(1.2)
Description of alarms
Tab.15 - Description of alarms
Alarm LED (yellow)
Power LED (green)
Meaning
On
On
Cable open
Off
On
Remote Power supply is OK
Blinking
Off
Cable short circuit
Fig.13 - PoE injector interface
MN.00273.E - 004
49
6.5
WAVEGUIDE FLANGE
Type
see Tab.16
Tab.16 - Type
Frequency band
Type
UDR 70
UBR 84
UBR 84
11
UBR 100
13
UDR 120
15
UDR 140
18
UBR 220
23
UBR 220
26
UBR 220
32
UBR 320
38
UBR 320
42
UBR 500
Maximum length
see.Tab.17
Tab.17 - Maximum length
Waveguide maximum length
50
Channel spacing
(m)
7 MHz
10
14 MHz
10
28 MHz
10
40 MHz
56 MHz
MN.00273.E - 004
6.6
MECHANICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Physical size of system components:

Tab.18 - ODU dimension
ALFOplus
Width (mm)
Height (mm)
Depth (mm)
256
256
114
Weight of system components:

-
ALFOplus
6.7
< 4.5 kg
SURGE AND LIGHTNING PROTECTION
Protection method:
Gas discharger technical characteristics
gas dischargers
DC spark-over voltage
150V +/-20%
Nominal impulse discharge

current (wave 8/20 s)
20kA
Single impulse discharge

current (wave 8/20 s)
25kA
Operation and storage temperature
-40C +90C
Performances
in accordance to EN 301 489
6.8
ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
Operating temperature range
33C +55C
Survival temperature range (reduce MTBF)
-40C +70C
Operational humidity
class
weatherproof according to IP65 environmental
Thermal resistance
thermal resistance 0.5C/W
Solar heat gain
not exceeding 5C
Wind resistance
150 km/h (in operation)

200 km/h (survival)
Solar shield on the ODU guarantees an additional protection against temperature increase.
MN.00273.E - 004
51
EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION
7.1
GENERAL
SIAE ALFOplus is a radio system for digital link in full outdoor mechanics.
ALFOplus (Access Link Full Outdoor) microwave radio system is available in various frequency ranges from
6 to 42 GHz.
The Outdoor Unit can be easily installed and configured owing to its:
reduced size
easily orientable antenna
broad operating temperature range
high flexibility of line interfaces selection
low consumption.
The first description given in the following first concerns the circuitry common to all the versions, then that
of the line interfaces will follow.
7.1.1
Block diagram
The ALFOplus consists of two PCB housed in a small size aluminium cabinet:
BBP-GE (Baseband processor Gigabit electrical)
TRx (IF and RF transceiver)
BBP-GO (Baseband processor Gigabit optical)
TRx (IF and RF transceiver)
or
The description that follows (see Fig.14 and Fig.15) details the block diagrams of electrical and optical version.
52
MN.00273.E - 004
MN.00273.E - 004
MII
SWD
RAM
SSD
Microcontroller
Surge protection,
magnetics,
Poe splitter
Surge protection
& magnetics
BBP: base band processor
Aux DC/DC
Main DC/DC,
Aux Pwr Supply
Ge LAN1
Ge LAN2
GMII
GMII
ADC
ADC
2xSync
RAM
FPGA
Vga
Vga
PWM
ADC
QSPI
CONN
Filter
Filter
ADC
PW
DA
DA
DEM
LO
Filter
Filter
TRX: IF and RF transceiver
Down converter,
Agc
MOD
LO
Fig.14 - ALFOplus GE
53
Fig.15 - ALFOplus GO
54
MN.00273.E - 004
MII
PHY
GMII
GMII
RAM
SSD
Microcontroller
SWD
BBP: base band processor
Main DC/DC,
Aux DC/DC
Aux Pwr Supply
Surge
Ge LAN2 protection,
magnetics,
PoE splitter
Ge LAN1 (SFP 1000BaseX)
GMII
ADC
ADC
FPGA
RAM
Vga
Vga
PWM
ADC
QSPI
Filter
Filter
ADC
PWM
DAC
DAC
CONN.
DEM
LO
Filter
Filter
TRX: IF and RF transceiver
Down converter,
Agc
MOD
LO
7.1.2
Baseband processor
The baseband Processor (BBP) carries out the following operations:
primary and secondary power supply
line interfaces and protections
baseband circuits and packets processing
I and Q signals generation and sampling
I, Q demodulator
Rx baseband filtering
Actuators and measurement points for TRx unit
FPGA debug connector
FPGA
Controller
BBP unit is different depending on the interface type (electrical or optical).
7.1.2.1
Firmware
Equipment software permits to control and manage all the equipment functionality and it is distributed on
two hardware levels: main controller and ODU peripheral controllers.
Firmware can be updated through the Web Lct and it is stored in two different memory benches: one containing the running firmware and the other the stand-by firmware. This permits to download a new firmware release to the stand-by bench without cutting the traffic. Use Bench Switch to activate the bench
in stand-by (SW restart will be performed).
7.1.2.2
Web Lct
The Web Lct is a web interface software already present in the ALFOPlus, which requires Adobe Flash Player
and allows the configuration and the management of the local radio, using LAN Port Management. When
the remote one is configured properly, the whole link can be managed. WEB Lct runs on any browser (Internet Explorer, Firefox etc....). Web Lct console is a free software downloadable from the site www.siaemic.com after registration.
In order to transfer data, WebLCT console or SCT running is necessary.
7.1.2.3
Alarm system
There are two ways of processing the alarms:
through LEDs
through SCT/WebLCT
Alarm associated to ALFOplus can be classified in different groups. Names and composition of these groups
as well as association between alarm classes and relay contact can be defined by the customer.
Alarms are divided into 4 severity levels according to the effects that an alarm might cause to the regular
operation of the unit detecting it. Levels are prioritised as follows:
Critical (red): out-of-service. hw failure. urgent alarm
Major (orange): loss of signal, minimum residual functionality, urgent alarm
minor (yellow): failure neither urgent, high residual functionality, not urgent alarm
warning (light blue): indication or wrong configuration, not urgent alarm
none (green): no alarm or masked alarm
MN.00273.E - 004
55
Critical and Major alarms indicate impossibility of executing a service, hence the faulty units needs to be
serviced. Minor level represents the not urgent alarms which do not prejudice service continuity. Warning
level indicates malfunctions that might be locally removed without having to replace the unit.
Alarm classification can be modified via SCT/WebLCT operator. A short description is given for each alarm
in Alarms section with relevant class.
The visual indication is given by a LED, which can be green or red. The information provided are:
Red light:
-
ON - An internal alarm is active. Connect the PC for troubleshooting
Flashing - An external alarm is active
Green light:
-
Flashing - No radio connection with far-end terminal
ON - Radio connection with far-end terminal is active
During the power-up follows three status of display Led (see Tab.19)
Tab.19 - bootstrap status display
7.1.3
Led
1st step - boot strap
2nd step - Loading WebLCT
3rd step - Ready to

management
Green
OFF
OFF
OFF/BLINKING
Red
OFF
ON
OFF/BLINKING
Orange
ON
OFF
OFF
TRX Transceiver unit
TRX Transceiver consists of the following functional blocks:
power supply dedicated to microwave circuits
Tx baseband filtering
I, Q modulator
frequency synthesizer
microwave transmitter and receiver
IF devices on Rx side
7.1.4
Switch for Ethernet ports
Inside ALFOplus is present an Ethernet switch with 2 external ports line side (electrical 10/100/1000BaseT
or optical 100/1000BaseFX), one internal radio port and one port towards controller (see Fig.16).
Internal port is represented by the local radio stream where through native Ethernet transport is connected
with the remote equipment.
56
MN.00273.E - 004
Microcontroller
Ethernet
packet switch
10/100BaseT
LAN1
LAN2
Port A
1000BaseT
Radio
1+0
10/100/1000BaseT
Fig.16 - ALFOplus block diagram
Switch function
ALFOplus can operate like a switch between two or more separated LANs with the following advantages:
to connect two separate LANs
to connect two LANs via radio within a complex digital network
to keep separated the traffic into two LANs towards MAC filtering to get a total traffic greater than
the traffic in a single LAN.
By default the routing works on basis Mac Address (Layer 2), but it can be enabled on basis VLAN ID, in
Web Lct - Ethernet switch (Enh) - Common Parameters.
The operation is the following: when a LAN port receives a MAC frame, on the basis of destination address,
it decides which LAN to send it:
if destination address is on originating LAN the frame is discarded
if destination address is a known address (towards address learning procedure) and is present into
local address table, the frame is sent only on destination LAN (MAC switching)
otherwise the frame is sent to all ports with the same VLAN ID (flooding).
Take account the value of Max Packet Size (byte) when 802.1Q setting is set as DISABLE or FALLBACK
the switch adds 4 Bytes for internal S_Tag. With 802.1Q setting in SECURE (that means that packet VID
must be contained in Virtual LAN table list, otherwise the packet is discarded), no internal TAGs are added.
Ethernet Speed/Duplex function

With electrical interface, in Web Lct - Baseband - Lan, Speed/Duplex can be manually or automatically
activated as half Duplex or Full Duplex 10/100/1000Base-T, while with optical interface, Speed Duplex can
be set as Full Duplex 100/1000Base-X.
Link Loss Forwarding

Link Loss Forwarding (LLF) is an alarm status of Ethernet interface. LLF can be enabled or disabled.
If LLF is enabled, any linkdown alarm will generate the alarm status of Ethernet interface blocking any
transmission to it. LLF can be enabled for each ports.
With LLF enabled the equipment connected (routers, switches so on) can be notified that radio link is not
available and can temporarily re-route the traffic.
MN.00273.E - 004
57
MDI/MDIX cross-over
For each LAN interface, cross-over cable can be set in Web Lct - Baseband - Lan - Cable Crossover as:
Auto - Lan recognizes automatically the connected cable type (Straight cable or Crossover cable)
MDI (NIC) - Manual crossover wiring type T568A
MDI-X (Switch) - Manual crossover wiring type T568B
With crossover cable it is necessary to use the same wiring format (MDI/MDI or MDI-x/MDI-x) on both
ends. In case of straight cable is the opposite (MDI/MDI-X or MDI-X/MDI).
VLAN functionality
ALFOplus works with IEEE 802.1q and 802.1p tag. Tag is made up with:
a fixed word of 2 bytes
3 bits for priority according with 802.1p
1 fixed bit
12 bits VLAN identifier (VLAN ID) according with 802.1q.
Switch cross-connections are based on Vlan Configuration Table where input and output ports or only output ports should be defined for any used VID. Vlan ID (VID) has a range from 1 to 4095.
Ethernet Flow Control (802.3x)

A network device asks its adjacent devices to send a pause frame because the input is faster it can process.
The protocol used for this purpose is the flow control (802.2x).
Port Based VLan

Port Based VLan (or Lan Per Port) allows to share the Ethernet traffic (Ingress or Egress) in the internal
SIAE switch.
7.1.5
Synchronisation
Into ALFOplus a synchronisation circuit, called SincE and defined by the standard G.8264, gets the synchronisation signal from the following different sources:
LAN1
LAN2
radio
Internal source
As shown in Fig.17 the clocks extracted from the sources are sent to a selection circuit that chooses one
of the signals depending on the control sent by a selection logic.
This latter acts on the base of alarm roots (Synch Loss, Synch Drift, Holdover Freerunning), on the base
of assigned priority, manual forcing and preferential switch.
The selected clock drives an oscillator through a PLL circuit. The oscillator will generate the required synchronisation for the frame generation. If no input signals are available the internal oscillator source is used
for the local restart.
58
MN.00273.E - 004
Synchronisation
Source
Alarms
Clock Selector
TE LAN-1
Sync Loss
Sync Drift
Status
TE LAN-2
T0 Reference
Clk
T2 Radio
Selection Logical
Internal Clock
PLL
Circuit
Force Switch
Priority Control
Preferential Switch
Fig.17 - Synchronisation block diagram
7.1.6
Adaptive code modulation
ACM profiles
In ALFOplus radio family uses Adaptive Code and Modulation (ACM) in order to employ the correct modulation profile depending on the Rx signal quality.
Available ACM profiles are the following:
4QAM strong
4QAM
16QAM strong
16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
512QAM
1024QAM (optional).
MN.00273.E - 004
59
These profiles operate in an RF channel with the following bandwidth:
7 MHz
14 MHz
28 MHz
56 MHz
112 MHz (optional).
ACM switching
The usage of the previous modulation profiles in a fixed channel bandwidth results in a variable capacity.
The criteria defining the necessity of an ACM switching, upshift or downshift, is the Rx S/N ratio.
Upshift - When there is an increase of received S/N, within the same Channel Spacing, the modulation complexity is increased in the direction from 4QAM strong to 1024QAM increasing the spectral
efficiency
Downshift - When there is a decrease of received S/N, within the same Channel Spacing, the modulation is reduced in the direction from 1024QAM to 4QAM strong reducing the spectral efficiency,
In order to configure properly the radio link using ACM facility, an optimization must be found between
max traffic during good propagation conditions and max availability during bad propagation conditions. To
obtain this purpose the ACM in ALFOplus family can be configured via software setting the following parameters: ACM setting and Tx Power mode.
ACM setting
The ACM can vary modulation profiles between two extremes defined by the operator through software
configuration: Upper Modulation and Lower Modulation.
Upper modulation - When propagation into the given radio channel is in the better condition (high
Rx S/N), the radio link is working at the maximum throughput defined at Upper Modulation: the
highest modulation profile that ACM can employ
Lower modulation - When propagation into the given radio channel is in the worst condition (low
Rx S/N), the radio link is working at the minimum throughput, defined at Lower Modulation: the
lowest modulation profile that ACM can employ
Tx Power Ramp
Tx Power Ramp function permits to set Tx power according to the available modulation profiles.
Tx Power Ramp Disabled - Tx power is the same at any modulation profile
Tx Power Ramp Enabled - Maximum Tx power based on the reference modulation
The Tx Power Ramp is set depending on the modulation license of the user and depending on the Lower
Modulation that has been set.
7.1.7
ATPC and ACM interaction
The Automatic Transmission Power Control (ATPC) regulates the RF output power of the local transmitter
depending on the value of the RF level at the remote terminal. This value has to be preset from the local
terminal as threshold high and low. The difference between the two thresholds must be equal or higher
than 3 dB.
As soon as the received level crosses the preset threshold level low due to the increase of the hop attenuation, a microprocessor (P), embedded in the ALFOplus, at the receiver side of the remote terminal
sends back to the local terminal a control to increase the transmitted power.
60
MN.00273.E - 004
A good set of the thresholds is to put the ATPC Low Level threshold higher (or even slightly higher) than
the threshold of the highest modulation scheme of the ACM; this way, the ATPC start to work before than
the received signal is reduced and by consequence will force the system to downgrade the modulation. The
behaviour of the system is to always try to increase the PTX and so the System Gain, before than being
forced to reduce capacity due to modulation downgrade.
Resuming, the correct setting of the thresholds is when the two windows, the ATPC one and the ACM one,
are not overlapped, as per Fig.18.
Local
Remote PRx
dBm
Remote
Rx
Tx
PRx recording
level
PTx actuation
P
P
PTx control
Thresh High
Transmission
Rx
Tx
of PTx control
Thresh Low
Threshold
highest ACM
profile
ACM
range
Hop attenuation (dB)
Local PTx
dBm
PTx max.
ATPC range
PTx min.
Hop attenuation (dB)
Fig.18 - ATPC diagram
MN.00273.E - 004
61
7.2
LOOPS
To control the equipment correct operation a set of local and remote loops are made available. The commands are forwarded by the WEBLCT program. The available loop facilities are:
Line Loop (Ethernet Port Loop)
Baseband loop
RF loop (only for GB8xxxx)
PHYSICAL
ETHERNET
PORT
Tx
LINE
LOOP
ALFO Plus
BBP-GE
RADIO
BASE
BAND
LOOP
RF Loop
Rx
Fig.19 - Available loops
7.3
RATE LIMITING AND INGRESS FILTER POLICING
7.3.1
Rate limiting
In SIAE equipment it is possible to apply the Rate Limit, i.e. to limit the total rate passing through an interface. It is possible to apply the rate limiting from 64 kbit/s up to the maximum port speed (up to 1GE).
The values that can be inserted are pre-fixed from 64 kbit up to 10Mbit (64Kb, 128kb, 256kb, 512kb, 1Mb,
2Mb, 3Mb, 4Mb, 5Mb, 6Mb, 7Mb, 8Mb and 9Mb), In the range from 10Mbit/s up to 1Gbit/s the limiting values can be chosen by the user with a 10Mbit/s step. i.e. the minimum selectable granularity is 10Mb/s.
7.3.2
Ingress filtering policy (CIR/EIR according to MEF 10.2)
SIAE equipment allows limiting the ingress traffic rate on the basis of:
62
LAN port (Bandwidth profile per UNI): a different profile is defined for each LAN port (VLAN ID and
priority are not considered in this case by the rate limiting algorithm)
VLAN (Bandwidth profile per EVC): a different profile is defined for different VLANs (priority is not
considered in this case by the rate limiting algorithm). Up to 64 VLAN can be managed with different
profiles.
VLAN + priority (Bandwidth profile per CoS): a different profile is defined for different couples
VLAN+priorities (up to 64 different cases can be managed). In this case the packet priority is always
considered by the rate limiting algorithm. More than one priority can be included in the same bandwidth profile.
MN.00273.E - 004
In general different criteria can be defined for each port/VLAN/priority. Up to 64 Ingress Filtering Policy
resources can be defined and each bandwidth profile defined on the basis either of LAN port, VLAN or
VLAN+priority consumes 1 of such resources.
In order to define the bandwidth profile, the following parameters must be configured:
CIR (Committed Information rate): it is the admitted ingress rate (green coloured), with values
between 0 kbit/s and 1 Gbit/s
CBS (Committed Burst Rate): it is the maximum size of the token bucket of the green packets, with
values between 0 byte and 128 kbyte.
EIR (Excess Information Rate): it is maximum ingress rate admitted when possible (yellow coloured), with values between 0kbit/s and 1Gbit/s.
EBS (Excess Burst Rate): it is maximum size of the token bucket of the yellow packets, with values
between 0 byte and 128 kbyte.
CF (Coupling Flag): if enabled, the excess token (if any) charged into the green bucket are moved
into the yellow packet bucket.
Red packets, i.e. the ones exceeding the CIR+EIR rate, are automatically discarded. In other words, the
rate obtained with the sum of CIR+EIR is the maximum rate allowed to be transmitted.
The combination of CIR and EIR rates is typically referred to as PIR, or Peak Information Rate, which
represents the total burstable bandwidth sold to the customer.
According to MEF 10.2 (Metro Ethernet Forum) specifications, the bandwidth profile service attribute (Input Filter Policing), which includes some or all of the above categories, can be defined per UNI, per EVC or
per CoS identifier (CoS ID; EVC.CoS). For any given frame, however, only one such model can apply. The
service provider meets the bandwidth guarantees by reserving appropriate network resources and employing a two-rate/three-colour (trTCM) rate-limitation methodology as part of its traffic engineering policy to
ensure compliance by user traffic.
Green = Trasmitted:
CIR and CBS.
Yellow = Low Priority (dropped in case of congestion):
EIR and EBS.
Red = Dropped:
traffic exceeding EIR and EBS is dropped.
CIR (green)
CBS (green)
EIR (yellow)
EBS (yellow)
dropped (red)
dropped (red)
For any port it is possible to add a Input Filter Policy table with this selections:
Disable
Uni Port Based
EVC C_Vid Based
COS C_Vid + Priority Based
EVC S_Vid/C_Vid Based
COS S_Vid/C_Vid + Priority Based
According the status of 802.1q Management> 802.1q settings =
Disable: you can select only Uni Port Based with CIR, EIR, CBS and EBS; Cf disable is ok.
Fallback: two selections 1) EVC C_Vid Based: applied to a CVLAN C_Vid with CIR, EIR, CBS and
EBS; Cf disable is ok. 2) COS C_Vid + Priority Based: applied to a CVLAN C_Vid with priority range,
CIR, EIR, CBS and EBS; Cf disable is ok.
Secure: two selections 1) EVC S_Vid/C_Vid Based: applied to a SVLAN S_Vid and a CVLAN C_Vid
with CIR, EIR, CBS and EBS; Cf disable is ok. 2) COS S_Vid/C_Vid + Priority Based: applied to a
SVLAN S_Vid and CVLAN C_Vid with priority range, CIR, EIR, CBS and EBS; Cf disable is ok.
Into switch there is a total of 64 instances of Input Filter Policing for all the four ports into any radio port.
Any CVID can be used into only one port.
Into same port same CVID can be reused but with different priority.
MN.00273.E - 004
63
Enhanced QoS Management

The SIAE switch scheduler provides enhanced QoS management features. Based on the ingress port (and
optionally also as a function of the VLAN-ID), there are four different modes that can be used to set the
priority of an Ethernet frame:
Ethernet: the priority is set based on the PCP (Priority Code Point) field of the VLAN tag
(IEEE802.1p) (Native 802.1p C_Vid)
MPLS: the priority is set based on the EXP (Experimental Bit) field of the MPLS tag (Native MPLS)
IP: the priority is set based on the DSCP field of the either IPv4 or IPv6 (Native ToS/DSCP)
Default: the priority is set in a static mode and its value is configurable based on the Entering LAN
interface. This Default configuration is a Port Based Priority with default priority value of 0 (lowest
priority). These priority values can be configured by the user within the range from 0 (lowest priority) up to 7 (higher priority). The Default mode is also used when all the other criteria are not applicable.
It is in addition possible to map the EXP quality of the MPLS label into the PCP field of the outer VLAN tag
(802.1p Rewrite with MPLS). Once the priority is assigned, the packet is sent to one of the 8 output queues.
The size of each one of the 8 queues is configurable with one value between the following seven options:
128kbit, 256kbit, 512kbit, 1024kbit, 2048kbit, 4096kbit and 8192kbit.
On the basis of the filling status of the queue, different drop-policy can be applied. In SIAE switch there
are four available policies:
Tail drop: if the packet is arriving into a full queue, it will be discarded
Queue drop: if a new packet is arriving into a full queue, the whole queue is emptied (with the exception of the head packet)
RED: when a new packet is arriving into the queue it has a discarding-probability that is function of
the filling status of the queue. the relation between the probability and the queue status is defined
by means of a SW configurable curve. If the queue is full, the new packet is discarded with probability 1 (like in the Tail drop case).
WRED: it is similar to RED, with the difference that for each queue two drops curves are defined.
the packet in ingress is coloured according to MEF 10.2, i.e.e according to the CIR and EIR ingress
filtering policy defined. As a consequence, WRED can be chosen only if CIR/EIR Ingress filtering policy is enabled for the ingress port. Once coloured, red packets are always discarded, while green
and Yellow packets are managed according to different curves.
The traffic in the queues is then emptied by means of either Strict priority or Weighted Fair Queue algorithm. With the Strict Priority the highest priority takes always precedence. With WFQ the available bandwidth is shared between the different priorities with configurable weights. It is in addition possible to
configure at the same time some queues as Strict Priority and the remaining as WFQ.
Going into details:
Strict Priority: first, all the packets from the highest priority queue are transmitted, then all the
packets from the second queue, and so on.
Weighted Fair Queueing (W.F.Q.): the packets are sent on the radio following a rule based on the
weight assigned to each Queue.
Each queue i with WFQ is given a weight (importance) Wi.
WFQ guarantees a minimum service rate to queue i
Ri = R*Wi/(W1+W2+....+Wn) [Rate of the queue i]
Where:
R = rate of the servant (capacity available on the MW link)
W i= weight of the Queue taken in consideration
Wn = weight of the last Queue with WFQ enabled
This means that the rate of the queue is a fraction of the total bandwidth that depends
on the weight assigned to the Queue.
For example if the weights are set as Fig.20.
64
MN.00273.E - 004
Fig.20 Means that the Serving Priority of the frames present in the queues will be:
the packets present in the Queue 7 will be transmitted with a Race 8/35
the packets present in the Queue 6 will be transmitted with a race 8/35
......
the packets present in the Queue 0 will be transmitted with a rate 1/35.
7.4
CONGESTION AVOIDANCE
The Congestion Avoidance is a protocol that permits to discard some frames before congestion occurs.
When the queue is full there is a congestion situation, this means that the resources are not enough to
serve all the packets and there is not enough room in the queue for more storage. In this case some packet
must be dropped. The choice of the dropping policy has different effects on the network. In case of congestion, the TCP/IP protocol reduces the transmitting windows and therefore the amount of traffic transmitted. The TCP/IP protocol increases the transmitting window very slowly to allow the network to solve
the congestion issues.
This means that, when congestion occurs, some selective dropping has to be done.
There are different policies of dropping that can be adopted:
Tail: in this case the last packets that come to the full queue are dropped (default configuration)
Queue: in this case all the queue is emptied, i.e. all the packets present in the Queue are dropped
Red: Random Early Discard: with this policy, before the Queue is full some incoming packets are
dropped randomly regardless if the frames are marked yellow or green (for more details on yellow
or green frames please refer to the paragraph 7.3.2 Ingress filtering policy (CIR/EIR according to
MEF 10.2))
WRed: Weighted Random early Discard: with this policy, before the Queue is full some incoming
packets are dropped randomly. First are dropped the packets coloured in yellow and then are
dropped the packet coloured in green, see Fig.21.
MN.00273.E - 004
65
Fig.21 - Red curve

Once WRed is enabled the threshold of Smin Smax and Pmax for the Green and Yellow frames have to be set.
The value set the points of the curve shown in Fig.21. There are some predetermined profiles to be enabled:
Profile 1:
-
Smin= 30
Smax=60
Pmax=10
Profile 2:
-
Smin= 20
Smax=40
Pmax=10
These profiles can be set for the Yellow Frames (Y) and Green Frames (G) as well. These values represent:
66
Smin: represents the threshold after which the switch starts dropping packets
Sman and Pmax: are the thresholds that makes the curve of Drop Percentage/Average Queue Occupation change. After this point the dropping packets increase rapidly.
Red Gentle: after the point represented by Smax and Pmax: the Drop percentage can increase to
a 100% (RED) or can linearly increase. the choice of how to increase, directly or linearly to a 100%
is manage by disabling or enabling the RED Gentle.
RED (Random Early Drop): no packet are dropped until Average Queue Occupation % reaches
Smin(G, Green), packets are dropped randomly until a percentage of Pmax and an Occupation %
of Smax(G) limits are reached, all packets are dropped over an Occupation % higher than Smax(G);
RED Gentle (Enable): no packets are dropped until Average Queue Occupation % reaches Smin(G,
Green); with Average Queue Occupation % higher than Smin(G) and lower than Smax(G), packets
are dropped randomly with a percentage defined by the straight line between Smin(G)/0 and
Smax(G)/Pmax(G); with Average Queue Occupation % higher than Smax(G) the percentage of randomly dropped packets is defined by the straight line between Smax(G)/Pmax(G) and Sgentle(G)/
100%;
WRED (Weighted Random Early Drop): Weighted RED is a two line RED; one line for Green packets,
one line for Yellow packets; Green and Yellow are defined by CIR and EIR into Input Filtering Policy
(Lan1,2,3,4);
no green packet is dropped until Average Queue Occupation % reaches Smin(G, Green);
no yellow packet is dropped until Average Queue Occupation % reaches Smin (Y, Yellow);
with Average Queue Occupation % higher than Smin(G) and lower than Smax(G) green packets are
MN.00273.E - 004
dropped randomly with a percentage defined by the straight line between Smin(G)/0 and Smax(G)/
Pmax(G);
with Average Queue Occupation % higher than Smin(Y) and lower than Smax(Y) yellow packets are
dropped randomly with a percentage defined by the straight line between Smin(Y)/0 and Smax(Y)/
Pmax(Y);
all green packets are dropped over an Occupation % higher than Smax(G);
all packets are dropped over an Occupation % higher than Smax(Y);
WRED Gentle (Enable): Weighted RED is a two line RED; one line for Green packets, one line for
Yellow packets; Green and Yellow are defined by CIR and EIR into Input Filtering Policy
(Lan1,2,3,4);
for Green packets no packet is dropped until Average Queue Occupation % reaches Smin(G);
with Average Queue Occupation % higher than Smin(G) and lower than Smax(G) green packets are
dropped randomly with a percentage defined by the straight line between Smin(G)/0 and Smax(G)/
Pmax(G);
with Average Queue Occupation % higher than Smax(G), the percentage of dropped green packets
is defined by the straight line between Smax(G)/Pmax(G) and Sgentle(G)/100%;
for Yellow packets no packet is dropped until Average Queue Occupation % reaches Smin(Y);
with Average Queue Occupation % higher than Smin(Y) and lower than Smax(Y) green packets are
dropped randomly with a percentage defined by the straight line between Smin(Y)/0 and Smax(Y)/
Pmax(Y);
with Average Queue Occupation % higher than Smax(Y), the percentage of dropped green packets
is defined by the straight line between Smax(Y)/Pmax(Y) and Sgentle(Y)/100%;
WRED and WRED Gentle are very efficient to get the most from the radio link available traffic avoiding the
stop and go behaviour (SAW trend) typical of congested TCP/IP traffic.
Warning: RED and WRED impact only TCP/IP traffic, not UDP traffic.
Ethernet Frame Fragmentation

QoS preserve High priority traffic, by giving it precedence during traffic congestions. However, in case of
real time traffic also latency and jitter are important factors. Latency is strictly related to the line speed
and usually can be managed by designing the network topology in a proper way (e.g. by limiting the maximum number of hops in link chains). Jitter is instead a more sensitive parameter because it depends on
the traffic conditions.
In fact, when a High priority packet has to be sent over the radio link it is scheduled on a High Priority
queue. However, before to be sent over the radio link it has to wait that the packet currently in transmission (even a Best Effort packet) will be entirely sent. This waiting time can considerably change depending
on the best effort packet size (from 64bytes to 1518 bytes of even more in case of jumbo frames). One
technique used to mitigate this phenomenon is packet fragmentation, i.e. longer frames are subdivided in
smaller fragments at Tx side. A label is added to the packet in order to number these subframes. At Rx
side the original frame is rebuilt after all the fragments are received. In this way, the maximum waiting
time for a High Priority packet is reduced to the sub-frame size (some hundreds of bytes), providing sensitive benefits to the packet jitter.
The SIAE switch allows to fragment Ethernet frames with two options: 256 or 512 Bytes.
For example: in case the radio is serving a 1024Byte frame in the lowest (queue 0) and there is an incoming
frame (256 bytes) in the highest priority queue (queue 7). The packet in the highest priority should be
served first, but since the servant is busy processing the packet in the lower queues, the 256Byte frame
has to wait until the radio has processed the 1024 Byte frame, see Fig.22.
MN.00273.E - 004
67
Fig.22 - Ethernet frame fragmentation disabled

With the fragmentation enabled the time that the packet in higher queues have to wait is smaller. With
fragmentation enabled the radio divides the 1024 byte packet into 4 packets of 256 Bytes and the servant
can transmit the first frame of 256 Byte in the lower queue and then transmit the high priority traffic, reducing the jitter in the network, see Fig.23.
Fig.23 - Ethernet frame fragmentation enabled
Enhanced VLAN Management

The SIAE switch provides the following enhanced VLAN management features:
68
VLAN rewriting
Selective QinQ based on VLAN and IEEE 802.1p priority
MN.00273.E - 004
VLAN rewriting
VLAN rewriting is a feature available on radio side that allows to rewrite the VID of C-TAG of the packet
received (uplink side) or sent (downlink side) by the switch.
On uplink side (packets received on LAN interface by the switch and sent to the radio) the VID can be rewritten on the basis of the following criteria:
-
LAN port + C-VID: new values of C-VID to be written into the packet can be configured on the basis
of its original C-VID and the LAN port where it has been received.
LAN port + C-VID + priority: new values of C-VID to be written into the packet can be configured
on the basis of its original C-VID + priority and the LAN port where it has been received.
On uplink side it is possible to configure for all the LAN ports up to 64 LAN port + C-VID or LAN port + CVID + priority criteria.
On downlink side (packets received on radio side and sent by the switch on the LAN interface):
the VID can be rewritten on the basis of the C-VID of the received packet. I.e., new values of CVID to be written into the packet can be configured on the basis of its original C_VID. It is possible
to configure up to 64 C-VID criteria in downlink, independently by the uplink configuration.
C-VID can be removed selectively. It is possible to select the C-VID, enable the option Removed
and select the Output interface. In other words on downlink side it is possible to select the C-VID
to be remove and the correspondent Output LAN.
Selective QinQ based on VLAN and IEEE 802.1p priority

VLAN staking (also named QinQ) is a feature that allows an Ethernet frame to include more than one IEEE
802.1Q TAG. The scope of VLAN staking is to differentiate the traffic at different levels when the packets
must cross networks managed by different entities.
The SIAE switch radio supports the Vlan staking. Once a packet enters into the radio it is possible to add
a new IEEE 802.1Q TAG. The VID of the new TAG can be set based on different criteria:
-
Ingress port of the packet
C-VID and priority of the packet when received on the ingress port
The new TAG is added to the packet as a S-TAG. The Ethertype field of the TAG can be set either to standard values (0x88A8, 0x9100, 0x9200, 0x9300) or to any other custom values.
Packet Compression
The SIAE switch provides header packet compression. This feature allows to compress the packet header
by transmitting over the radio link proprietary labels in place of long and repetitive header field.
Multi-layer Packet Compression supports the following protocols: Ethernet, MPLS, IPv4/IPv6, UDP and RTP
and LTE S1 interface tunnelling. This latter cover the case of LTE eNodeB backhauling on S1 interface,
where the eUE traffic (either IPv4 or IPv6) is enveloped into a GTP-U tunnel. The Header compressed in
this case includes (IPv4+UDP+GTP-U of the S1 interface)+(IPv4/IPv6+UDP+RTP of the eUE traffic inserted
into the tunnel).
When enabled, the user can select which header have to be compressed considering the following maximum limits:
the total header field size cannot exceed 124 bytes
the total header field size after internal coding cannot exceed 118 bytes. the internal coding is required by SIAE switch in order to perform the compression task.
In Fig.24 are detailed the different header fields that can be selected with their weight in terms of header
field size and header field size after internal coding.
MN.00273.E - 004
69
Header field
Header
size after
field size
internal coding
(Bytes)
(Bytes)
Ethernet
+14
+12.5
+4
+2
+(4*n)
+(2*n)
+(4*n)
+(4*n)
+4
+3.5
IPv4 only (default)
+20
+19.5
IPv4 or IPv6
+40
+39.5
+8
+8
+12
+12
+100
+99
C-TAG (802.1Q)
Q-in-Q (802.1ad)
Max number of S-TAG (from 1 to 2)
(default=1)
MPLS
Max number of MPLS labels (from 1 to 3), PW included
(default=1)
Control Word (RFC4385)
IP+
UDP
RTP
Tunneling OPv4 - IPv4/IPv6(IPv4+UDP+GTP-U+IPv4/IPv6+UDP+RTP)
Fig.24 - Header compression
LAG - Link Aggregation (IEEE 802.3ad)

Link Aggregation (LAG) is a feature available on SIAE switch that allows assigning up to 4 physical links
to one logical link (trunk) that functions as a single, higher-speed Ethernet link.
SIAE switch support IEEE802.3ad LAPC (Link Aggregation Control Protocol). LACP allows a network device
to negotiate an automatic bundling of links by sending LACP packets to the peer (directly connected device
that also implements LACP). In addition to the increased capacity and/or protection line of the logical link
and/or protection line, LACP provides additional advantages:
70
Failover detection when a link fails, allowing for a trunk reconfiguration in order to avoid systematic
packet loss (after the reconfiguration the packets will be lost only if the throughput exceed the trunk
capacity)
MN.00273.E - 004
it introduces an agreement between the two LACP peers before the staring of data transmission over
the trunk. This prevent anomalous behaviour in case of cabling or configuration mistakes.
LACP works by sending frames (LACPDUs) over the links belonging to the trunk. Also the equipment deployed on the other end of the trunk will send LACP frames over the same links: this enables the two units
to establish the trunk. LACP can be configured two modes: active or passive. In active mode it will always
send frames along the configured links. However, in passive mode it acts as speak when spoken to and
therefore it can be used as a way of controlling accidental loops (as long as the other device is in active
mode). SIAE switch implements an active LACP.
A Line Trunk can aggregate up to 2 LAN interfaces with the following restrictions:
all the LAN interfaces must be defined with the same speed (either 10, 100 or 1000 Mbit/s)
all the LAN interfaces must be set in Full Duplex mode
When a Trunk is defined on SIAE switch, the end-to-end traffic is transmitted over all the aggregated lines.
As a result, the overall capacity of the trunk can be theoretically equal to the number of aggregated lines
multiplied by the capacity of a single line. In the example of Fig.25, two full duplex - 1Gbit/s connection
are grouped into the same trunk, carrying all the capacity in transit from a radio link to another. In this
configuration, the line aggregation is used as line protection, although it can transport 2 Gbit/s capacity.
LAN1
1 Gbit/s
LAN1
LAN2
1 Gbit/s
LAN2
ALFOplus
ALFOplus
Line
trunking
2 Gbit/s
Fig.25 - Line trunking
To enable the Link Aggregation on both interfaces (LAN1 and LAN2), select the group Enable - Trunk1 or
Enable - Trunk2 in Web Lct - STP/ELP trunking menu.
Line Protection through distributed ELP

ELP (Ethernet Line Protection) is a feature available on SIAE switch that allows to protect a GE interface
against cable failure or accidental disconnection. With ELP it is possible to connect a switch to another network element by using two GE interfaces. Both interfaces are active but just one is enabled to forward and
receive traffic (forwarding state), while the other does not allow any traffic to pass (blocking state). If the
forwarding interface goes down, the other one passes to the forwarding state. The maximum switching
time is around 900msec. This feature does not imply the use of any protocol, but is simply based on the
status of the physical interfaces. As a consequence, no particular protocol support is required on the connected equipment: it is simply required to enable the two GE interfaces.
It is recommended to disable any Spanning Tree protocol on the external equipment: this could cause longer traffic recovery times.
To enable the Ethernet Line Protection on both interfaces (LAN1 and LAN2), select the group Enable Prot1 or Enable - Prot2 in Web Lct - STP/ELP trunking menu.
MN.00273.E - 004
71
7.5
ETHERNET OAM (OPERATION ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE)
This protocol can be used in any point-to-point Ethernet link. The aim of this protocol is to check and monitor the functionality of the service that the provider guarantees on the network.
7.5.1
Service layer OAM
The Service Layer OAM fully monitors a customer End-to-End Ethernet Service. Two main standards cover
this topic, the IEEE 802.1ag and ITU-T Y.1731.
The IEEE 802.1ag provides CFM (Connectivity Fault Management) useful for detecting, isolating and reporting connectivity faults. The ITU-T Y.1731 Standard comprehends the CFM plus some additional features, like RDI (Remote Defect Indicator) that allows to report back to the start of the chain the Alarm
message.
SIAE equipment support CFM according to both standards ITU-T Y.1731 and 802.1ag.
The IEEE 802.1ag and the ITU-T Y.1731 are End-to-End service, i.e. provide the tools to monitor the Ethernet Service regardless of the layers, Network Path and operators. Since the spectrum of application can
include many applications a more hierarchical structure is needed.
The Standards define:
72
Maintenance Domains (MD): these specify the Domains of operators, users and service providers.
Levels from 0 to 7 are possible depending on the type of service to be monitored. Customer Domain
is the higher which includes both ends of the Ethernet service (from one End user to the other End
user), Standard Default values for Customer Domain are 7, 6 and 5. Service Provider Domains
should have a MD lower than the Customer Domain since include the whole network except the End
Users. Standard default values for Provider Domains are 3 and 4. Operator Domains are lower than
Service Provider Domains since just a part of the network is included. Standard Default values for
operator domains are 0, 1 and 2. Here follows a picture explaining the hierarchical structure of Maintenance Domains.
ALFOplus: in SIAE equipment one Maintenance Domain can be specified. At each end of the Maintenance Domain two MEPs (Maintenance End Point) will be specified. The MEPs are markers that
define the end of a domain and are in charge of originating OAM frames. In a domain also MIPs
(Maintenance Intermediate Points) can be specified. The MIPs are passive check-points. The MEPs
and MIPs configuration are discussed in details in the following points. The choice of the domain and
the Domain Label (name) is left to the user. Particular attenuation must be paid to use the same
MD label in each equipment where the MD is specified, i.e. different equipment with same value of
MD domain but different MD labels belongs to different Domains.
MN.00273.E - 004
CE
PE
PE
Access
Network
Operator 1
Core Network
CE
Access
Network
Operator 2
Core Network
High Level
Customer
MEP
MEP
Service
Provider
MEP
MEP
MEP
MIP
MIP
MEP
Operator 1
Low Level
MEP
MIP
MIP
MEP
Operator 2
Fig.26 - Hierarchical structure of maintenance domains
A Maintenance Association (MA) is one association which correlates the VLAN to the MD in which
the MEPs and MIPs have to be defined.
ALFOplus: when a specified traffic needs to be monitored, then it is necessary to relay the VLAN to
a Domain and to the corresponding MEPs or MIPs through the MA. Before creating the Maintenance
Association, the VLAN, either S-VLAN or C-VLAN, has to be specified in the VLAN Table. In each
SIAE equipment it is possible to set up to 32 different MA. Particular attention must be paid to use
the same MA label in each equipment where the MA is specified, i.e. different MA labels on the same
VLAN correspond to different MA associations.
At the Edge of a MD there are MEPs (Maintenance End Points) and in the middle there could be MIPs
(Maintenance Intermediate Points). MEPs are the units in charge of managing the CFM to correctly
monitor the status of the Ethernet service provided. MIPs are passive check-points that answer to
pollings coming from MEPs. MEPs will forward OAM messages coming from higher domains and will
discard OAM messages generated from lower domains.
ALFOplus: Each interface can be configured as MEP, Port A interface (radio interface) included. Once
chosen the interface, depending on the network topology, the direction of the MEP has to be spec-
MN.00273.E - 004
73
ified. Two Directions are possible, MEP

and MEP
. With MEP
configured the OAM
PDUs are sent from the interface in the direction outside the equipment, i.e. the OAM PDUs are sent
from the interface on the cable toward next equipment. With MEP
configured the OAM PDUs
are sent from the interface toward the inside of the equipment and will follow the VLAN table previously configured. MEPs are distinguished from each other through a MEP ID, therefore MEPs belonging to same MA must have different MEP IDs. In order to configure a MIP the MA has to be
habilitated on the equipment. Up to 32 MIPs or MEPs can be configured on each equipment.
The protocols belonging to the Connectivity Fault Management implemented in SIAE equipment are listed
hereafter:
Continuity Check Protocol: this protocol enables the sending of a periodic message (like a Heartbeat
message) which enables the other MEPs deployed in the network to distinguish the status of a virtual connection. this message can only be originated by a MEP.
ALFOplus: is adjustable with 1s, 10s, 1min, 10min. These messages do not trigger any automatic
reply from the destination entity.
LoopBack Protocol: it resembles an IP PING message; once this message is sent (e.g. MEP1 sends
a Loopback Message to MEP2). MEP2 replies to MEP1 confirming therefore the status of the connection. This is done to check the status of the connection between the MEP originating the message
and the MEP/MIP to which the message is addressed. This message can only be originated from one
MEP and can be addressed to both MEPs or MIPs.
ALFOplus: the number of Loopback Messages in SIAE equipment is adjustable from 1 to 5 consecutive Loopbacks. In each equipment, it is possible for each MEP to check the presence of other MEPs
in the same MA. This is done through the Remote MEP application which allows this acknowledgement and distinguishes the other MEP through means of MEP IDs and MAC address.
Link Trace Protocol: this protocol sends a message similar to the LoopBack protocol. Every equipment that is reached by this message will answer to the sender providing its own MAC address. In
this way the sender is able to understand of which equipment the MA is composed. E.g. a MEP sends
the Link Trace Message to another MEP belonging to the same Maintenance Association. the MIPs
that are deployed in the middle of the path will forward this message and answer to the initiating
MEP with their own MAC Address. By doing so the initiating MEP knows the OAM-devices deployed
in the path and their order.
Remote Defect Indicator: this feature allows a MEP, in presence of a fault or a defect, to send a RDI
to inform the other MEPs, belonging to the same MA, of the presence of this Defect. The advantages
of this procedure are to avoid multiple Alarms created by the same cause and to be able to check
the status of other Remote MEPs. This RDI information is reported in the Continuity Check Message.
ALFOplus: this feature is present in SIAE equipment and the presence of this alarm can be checked
as well in the Remote MEPs screen on the equipment.
7.6
ETHERNET PERFORMANCE MONITORING - RMON
RMON (Remote Monitoring) is a standard whose function is providing a set of services of statistics count,
monitoring and alarm report with reference to the activity of a LAN network.
SIAE equipment support RMONv1, first MIB, as defined in RFC2819. This MIB contains real-time LAN statistics e.g. utilization, collisions and CRC errors. These counters are managed locally into the radio equipment and are defined independently for each port of the device (both LAN and Radio interfaces). SIAE
NMS systems collect periodically this data and store it into the network database. More in details, the RMON
implementation in SIAE Network Elements is classified into two groups:
74
RMON Statistics: These are the counters data collected in real time by the Network Equipment.
These data are stored in the network equipment itself and, the NMS Statistics viewer can visualize
this data with the Refresh button.
RMON - History: This is managed by the NMS through the collection of the counters data from the
Network Equipment. After a periodical polling to the Network Element, the NMS collects all the data
and these data are seen as the RMON History.
MN.00273.E - 004
In other words, the RMON Statistics are the data that are collected and stored in the Network Equipment,
while the RMON History is an aggregation of the data collected from each network equipment and the
database is located in the NMS.
7.7
RMON COUNTERS
RMON statistics are composed by counters for each port of the device that are stored in the equipment
deployed on field.
Into the equipment it can be chosen to store the values with a sampling period that can be defined between
two values: 1 min, 15 min, or both. For each sampling period the counters values are stored into the equipment. After a predefined period (polling period), all the RMON data stored by the equipment are get by the
NMS. The polling period can be either less than 4 hours (if the sampling period is 1 min) or 1 day (in case
the sampling period is 15 min). The NMS aggregates the files received to create a bigger database with
the History of the Performance Monitoring samples.
Here below are described the RMON counters available for each device interface (both LAN and radio
ports):
DropEvents: Total number of events (frames, or whole queue contents) in which packets were
dropped by the interface due to lack of resources.
Octets RX: Total number of octets of data (including those in bad packets) received by the interface.
Pkts RX: Total number of packets (including bad packets, broadcast packets, and multicast packets)
received.
BroadcastPkts RX: Total number of good packets received that were directed to the broadcast address.
Multicast Pkts RX: Total number of good packets received that were directed to a multicast address.
CRC Align Errors: Total number of packets received that had a length between 64 and the Max Packet Size configured on the equipment switch (in any case not exceeding 10240 bytes) with bad Frame
Check Sequence (FCS) and an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error).
Undersize Pkts: Total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets long and were otherwise well formed.
Oversize Pkts: The number of packets received during this sampling interval that were longer than
maximum allowable length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets) but were otherwise
well formed.
Fragments: Total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets in length and had either
a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with
a nonintegral number of octets (Alignment Error).
Jabbers: Total number of packets received that were longer than n (parameter Max Packet Size, it
can be set to 1522, 2048 bytes or 10240 Kbytes) octets, and had either a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral number
of octets (Alignment Error).
Collisions: The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this EthLannet segment.
Utilization Rx: The best estimate of the mean physical layer network utilization on this interface during this sampling interval, in hundredths of a percent. The percentage is always referred to a 1Gbit/
s port speed. So, it represents the mean RX throughput measured on the port during the sampling
period and it is expressed as a percentage of a port speed.
Octets TX: Total number of octets of data (including those in bad packets) transmitted.
Pkts TX: Total number of packets transmitted.
BroadcastPkts TX: Total number of good packets transmitted that were directed to the broadcast
address.
Multicast Pkts TX: Total number of good packets transmitted that were directed to a multicast address.
MN.00273.E - 004
75
Utilization TX: The best estimate of the mean physical layer network utilization on this interface during this sampling interval, in hundredths of a percent. The percentage is always referred to a 1Gbit/
s port speed. So, it represents the mean TX throughput measured on the port during the sampling
period and it is expressed as a percentage of a port speed.
All the counters described above are part of the RMON statistics and it is not possible to collect only a subset of them. It is however possible to select on which equipment interface activate the RMON statistics (for
example, they can be enabled only on the radio interface). This allows reducing the total amount of PM
data, for example avoiding data collection from unused LAN interfaces. This can be done on all Payload
Interfaces (regardless if electrical or optical), the Radio interfaces are included as well.
7.8
ADVANCED STATISTIC MONITORING FOR SERVICES AND PRIORITY COUNTERS
In addition to the Ethernet Counters per Port with SIAE equipment it is possible to set on the Radio interface
the RMON counters per Service (Vlan) or Priority (Queues). Differently from the previous RMON counters,
the Service and Priority counters can be activated for the following variables.
Octets TX: Total number of octets of data (including those in bad packets) transmitted.
Pkts TX: Total number of packets transmitted.
Octets RX: Total number of octets of data (including those in bad packets) received by the interface.
Pkts RX: Total number of packets (including bad packets, broadcast packets, and multicast packets)
received.
DropEvents: Total number of events (frames) in which packets were dropped by the interface due
to lack of resources.
The Service and Priority RMON can be activated and collected from NMS (Network Management System).
The Service and Priority RMON are based on the Advanced Ethernet Counters present on the equipment
and configurable on site. This means that on site it is possible to activate the Advanced Ethernet Counters
but not the Service and Priority RMON.
In any case the NMS has higher priority in respect to the configuration inserted through Web LCT. This
means that the local operator can enable and read the active measure, but when the configuration of these
RMON is done through NMS, the local operator can only read the values of the Advanced Ethernet Counters.
It is not possible to enable the RMON for Priority and, in the same equipment, the RMON per Vlan.
7.8.1
Priority RMON
The Priority RMON are based on the internal Queue of the equipment, not on the value of the Priority; this
implies that:
the maximum number of RMON (Priority) that can be enabled are limited to 8, i.e. the number of
the queues available in SIAE switch.
if traffic with different priorities are listed in the same Queue, the Priority RMON will work with one
Probe on the Queue. I.e. the traffic in the same Queue is seen as Same Priority Traffic and the
Priority RMON counts the frames belonging to the Queue
In other words, with Priority RMON there is a probe for each queue (8 queues in SIAE switch). Each probe
counts the variables listed above (Octets TX, Pkts TX, Octets RX, Pkts RX and DropEvents).
These counters will be available only with the Minimum Polling Policy of 15 min.
76
MN.00273.E - 004
7.8.2
Service RMON
The Service RMON counters allow the equipment to track the variables listed above depending on the Service (Vlan Tag). This type of RMON can be set only on the Radio interface.
Each equipment can be set to collect RMON up to 32 Services (Vlan Tag) and only on Customer Tag.
These counters will be available only with the Minimum Polling Policy of 15 min.
7.9
SYNCHRONISM
Network Synchronisation is a growing subject related to the network evolution from TDM to Ethernet payload.
In this chapter it will be described the different features supported by SIAE switch equipment for the synchronization transport. The decision of the correct source to enable and how to pass the synchronisation
signal to customers equipment depends on network situation which has to be evaluated case by case.
Sync
Sync
Sync
2G BTS
Sync
Sync
E1 TDM
ALFOplus
ALFOplus
ETH
E1 TDM
ETH
Reference
Clock
Sync
3G NodeB
Full IP
Ethernet/TDM
Network
Fig.27 - Node B and BTS synch

The main concept is to transfer the synchronization signal throughout the network deployed. This implies
that SIAE equipment will take the clock signal from the concentration points (POC) and transfer it towards
the tail sites and distribute the synchronization signal to the external equipment such as NodeBs and BTS
(see Fig.27).
Input
CK IN
ALFOplus
SETS
Output
CK OUT
Fig.28 - SETS circuit

Going into details, this means that each SIAE equipment (represented in Fig.28) will have, at least, one
Input and one Output CK.
Input (CK IN) is/are the interface/s where the SIAE equipment get the Clock signal from, these could be
another SIAE IDU or external equipment.
Output (CK OUT) is/are the interface/s where the SIAE equipment provides the Clock Signal to, these could
be another SIAE IDU or external equipment.
MN.00273.E - 004
77
Internally to each SIAE equipment the SETS identify the input and output types of interfaces by the following codes:
TE: This code represents an Ethernet interface (LAN) used as input CK
T0: Output interface. This code represents the Internal Clock
The purpose of the above list is to list the different acronyms used by the SETS that may be present in the
configuration screens.
When the Synchronization is enabled in SIAE MW equipment, in the configuration screen, there are some
features to be used for maintenance or refined tuning of the clock propagation.
Fig.29 - Synchronisation menu

Here below are listed the different configurations to be made:
78
Status Control: this is a forced status for maintenance purposes of the SETS. It can be forced in:
-
Free Running: Independently from the synchronization signal received, the clock is locked onto
the internal clock.
Hold Over: The SETS is locked into the internal clock which tries to preserve the frequency
received when the SETS was locked.
Locked: in this case the SETS is locked to a source of synchronization.
Time Settings: these are general setting for the synchronization

-
Hold Off Time: Time (expressed in ms) during which the system keeps the evaluated frequency of a synchronism source become invalid (not present or degraded). At the end of the Hold
Off time, the invalid source will be rejected and the first input source having a valid signal will
be used.
WTR Time: i.e. Wait-To-Restore, this is a wait time to avoid oscillations. Time (expressed in
minutes) that has to pass before allowing the selected valid input source to be actually used
within the process for the selection of T0 synchronism.
LTI Set Time and LTI Reset Time: are controls that avoid oscillations of Alarms. When one alarm
raises up, it has to be active for at least the LTI Set Time and when it disappears it has to be off
for at least LTI Reset Time.
Enabled: Enables the SSM in the equipment
MN.00273.E - 004
7.10
SOURCES OF SYNCHRONISM
SIAE equipment is able to select among different sources of synchronization. A priority has to be assigned
to enable each source, with a value ranging from 1 to 9 included. The priority 1 corresponds to the maximum value, while the priority 9 corresponds to the minimum value. The priority shall be used to select in
which order the different synch sources must be used. In case the Priority is set as Disabled the correspondent interface is not used as a synchronization source.
Fig.30 - Sources of synchronisation

The selectable sources of synchronisation are listed below. For each source it is also listed in square brackets the correspondent acronym used by the SETS:
Radio Interface: it is possible to have 1 radio interfaces (1+0).
GE Interface [TE]: to identify which LANs are the sources of synchronization they have to be chosen
under TE LAN A and TE LAN B. This implies that a maximum of 2 LAN interfaces can be set as
source of synchronization. The AGS-H reference clock can be received on any one the 4 LAN interfaces, independently from the fact they are electrical or optical. In order to receive the synchronization signal (and regardless of the SSM status) the GE interface has to be set as Slave. The
configuration choices and other details are explained in SSM on Ethernet Interfaces.
Internal Clock [T0]: with the Synchronization not enabled the IDU is locked into its internal clock
In case SSM is not enabled, the equipment switches from one source of synchronization to another following the priority scale, starting from the source set to priority 1 and scaling to the sources with higher values
of priority (i.e. lower priority level). The synch source switch occurs when the present source suffers one
of the following events:
The source of synchronization is not physically available
The clock deviation is bigger than 4.6 ppm (maximum deviation that the internal clock can follow).
In other words, if the LAN1 is selected as first source (priority 1) of synchronization, and the LAN2 is selected as the second source (priority 2) of synchronization, the SIAE equipment will be synchronized on
the LAN1 until the cable will be physically unplugged or the LAN1 frequency and phase will be out of their
specified ranges. Once one of these events occurs, the SIAE equipment will switch the source of synchronization to the second source listed. If the second source listed is unplugged or out of maximum range then
the SIAE equipment will switch to the third source and so on.
In case no other synch sources are available the SIAE equipment will go on Internal Source, i.e. the internal clock present in SIAE equipment. In this condition the internal clock will be kept in hold status, trying
to keep the last synchronization reference received. In these conditions, the internal clock of SIAE equip-
MN.00273.E - 004
79
ment has a reliability of 0.3 ppm over 24 h. When the SIAE equipment switches to internal clock, it propagates a quality of SEC SDH Equipment Clock.
7.11
PROVIDE SYNCHRONISM TO EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT
Once the SIAE equipment is synchronized, the clock signal has to be passed toward external equipment or
other SIAE equipment. SIAE equipment can give the synchronization signal through different interfaces.
Fig.31 - Provide synchronism

The interfaces that are available to provide synchronization to other SIAE or external equipment are:
Radio: this interface is passing the synchronism automatically to the remote equipment. No configuration is needed.
GE Interfaces: the TX CK of the all GE lines (i.e. LAN 1 and 2) is locked to the SETS. In this way,
the CK can be passed through these connections to other equipment provided that they support
Synchronous Ethernet. The GE Interfaces when used in Electrical can provide the CK signal to other
equipment: in this case the equipment port role must be Master. Once the synchronization is enabled in the SIAE equipment, automatically all the LAN interfaces are locked onto the SETS. This
implies that the synchronization signal is automatically provided onto all the LAN interfaces.
The choices of the interface to pass the clock signal depend strictly on the external equipment. This means
that in first place it is necessary to establish the possible sources of synchronization available on the external equipment. Depending on the availability of these sources, SIAE equipment will be configured with
the correspondent interface to pass the clock signal.
80
MN.00273.E - 004
7.12
G.8264 SSM SYNCHRONISATION STATUS MESSAGE
The SSM is a protocol that transmits the quality of the synchronization message throughout the network
(G.781).
In the synchronization network the transmission of the quality of the clock allows the network to be scalable and to provide redundancy. In case of failure of SIAE equipment or cable, it is helpful to provide redundancy for clock propagation in order to avoid synchronization loops.
Synchronisation loops could happen after a failure when two equipment are synchronising each other on
the same physical connection. If this happens the equipment will not present any alarm on the synchronization but will generate and propagate a not reliable clock. The quality of the clocks that are propagated
are:
PRC: Primary reference Clock Best quality clock reachable (Cesium Clock)
SSUT: Synchronization Supply Unit Transit (Rubidium Clock)
SSUL: Synchronization Supply Unit Local
SEC: SDH Equipment Clock (Crystal Clock)
DNU: Do not Use This signal informs the receiver to do not use this clock
Here above are listed in order from the better quality clock (PRC Primary Reference Clock) to the worse
quality clock (DNU Do Not Use). The better the quality is the more time can the SIAE equipment stay in
holdover (Internal Clock) without a degradation of the payload. In other words, better is the quality, longer
can remain reliable the clock in holdover cases.
The DNU quality is always propagated on the source on which the equipment is locked for synchronization.
In this way the Loops of synchronization are easily avoided.
Unless the user forces the CK quality input/output, SIAE equipment reads the quality present in the input
interfaces. This means that, unless there is some users modifications, SIAE equipment propagates the
quality of the clock as it is. I.e. the output quality is the same as the input quality.
E.g.: If in the input interface (POC Site) there is a quality of SSUT of the CK signal, SIAE equipment will
pass throughout the network this synchronization signal with a quality message of SSUT.
In case the SIAE equipment is in Holdover (internal clock) it changes the quality of the synchronization to
SEC quality. With SSM enabled, SIAE equipment will choose the sources of the synchronization based on
the better quality received.
In general, the equipment selects the synch source with the following criteria:
it chooses the sources with the highest quality
if more than one source have the same quality, the one with the highest priority is selected (i.e. the
ones that have the smaller priority value, from 1 up to 9)
in any case, if a DNU quality is received on the highest priority source, this latter is discarded and
the equipment selects an alternative source.
Example 1: if one SIAE equipment has the two following sources of synchronization, with the same priority:
a. LAN1 with quality SEC (Priority 1)
b. Radio with quality SSUT (Priority 1)
In case the sources have the same priority, the SIAE equipment will switch the source of synchronization to the best quality, in this case (b) the Radio with SSUT quality.
Example 2: if one SIAE equipment has the two following sources of synchronization, with the different quality and different priority:
a. LAN1 with quality SEC (Priority 1)
In case the sources have different priority and quality, the SIAE equipment will switch the source of
synchronization with higher quality, in this case (b) the Radio with Priority 2 and quality SSUT. However, if a DNU quality would be received on Radio, the IDU will switch the synch source to LAN1 interface.
Example 3: if one IDU has the two following sources of synchronization, with the same quality:
a. LAN1 with quality SSUT (Priority 1)
MN.00273.E - 004
81

In case the sources have equal quality, the SIAE equipment will switch the source of synchronization
with higher priority, in this case (a) the LAN1 with Priority 1 and quality SSUT. However, if a DNU quality
would be received on LAN1, the SIAE equipment will switch the synch source to Radio port.
The quality of the synchronism has to be enabled for each SIAE equipment and can be transported on the
following interfaces:
On the Ethernet Interfaces through a standard protocol (according to ITU-T G.8264)
Radio interface with Local/Remote Telemetry: Depending on the MW link configuration (1+0) the
SSM messages are passed to the remote SIAE equipment in different ways.
-
1+0 Configuration: In this case there is one Local/Remote Telemetry passing the SSM messages
Within this configuration table there are also some maintenance configurations such as:
Forced Switch: this command allows the operator to force the SETS to lock to a predetermined
source. This command is above all other configurations. This means that the SETS will be locked
onto this source even if the cable is unplugged
Preferential switch: In case two sources have equal priority it is possible to set a Preferential Source.
In any case the quality is the main parameter of choice, then when two sources have the same priority, the preferential source is chosen.
In relation to the SSM, it is possible to:
Visualize the quality of the clock signal received and transmitted (Rx Quality and Tx Quality)
Overwrite the Quality received or transmitted (Ovw Rx Qlty and Ovw Tx Quality) and the choices
are:
-
PRC: Primary reference Clock Best quality clock reachable (Cesium Clock)
SSUT: Synchronization Supply Unit Transit (Rubidium Clock)
SSUL: Synchronization Supply Unit Local
SEC: SDH Equipment Clock (Crystal Clock)
DNU: Do not Use This signal informs the receiver to do not use this clock
The Overwrite of the Quality of the Clock is configurable by the user and simply forces in input or output
the quality.
7.12.1
SSM on Ethernet Interfaces
In order to propagate the clock signal through the Ethernet 1GE Electrical interface it is necessary to set
correctly the master and slave option for each interface. It is possible to assign the roles (Master or Slave)
statically (as set up for source LAN) or dynamically (according to Synch direction).
This because the Master interface transmits the clock to the Slave interface and in case the direction of
propagation of the clock has to be changed (line failure, insufficient quality, etc..), the master and slave
assignment has to be re-negotiated with a consequent loss of traffic. This re-negotiation implies an interruption of the traffic from 2.4 to 2.6 seconds.
SIAE equipment allows to set the role of the interfaces to According to synch direction (dynamic), the
flow of the propagation of the clock signal is automatically changed depending on the transferring direction
of the CK.
If the role of the interfaces is set to As set up for source LAN (Static), the flow of the propagation of the
clock signal is fixed (see Fig.32).
Fig.32 - LAN synchronisation method
82
MN.00273.E - 004
The other configuration present in SIAE equipment that manage the role of the LAN interfaces (Master/
Slave) is present in the main configuration of each LAN interface. Regardless if each LAN interface is set
manually as Master/Slave or with autonegotiation, the setting of dynamic or static in the SSM configuration
is privileged. In other words if the Master/Slave are set manually in the interface configuration and in the
SSM is set According to synch direction, if needed, the role of the LAN changes according to synch directions.
When an electrical GE interface is in Master State (despite from the fact that it comes from a static or
dynamic setting) every synchronization signal that is coming from this interface has automatically the
quality of DNU. This does not occur for optical GE or FE interfaces (Electrical and Optical), where the Master and Slave roles are not foreseen and so the transmitting direction for the clock can be exchanged
without any port role re-negotiation.
All the Ethernet interfaces are locked on the SETS, regardless which LAN interfaces are set as sources of
synchronization. Nevertheless the Overwrite RX Quality and Overwrite TX Quality can be applied only
on the LAN interfaces used as sources of synchronization.
MN.00273.E - 004
83
84
MN.00273.E - 004
Section 3.
INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION OF ALFOPLUS SYSTEM
8.1
GENERAL INFORMATION TO BE READ BEFORE THE INSTALLATION
The installation, maintenance or removal of antenna systems require qualified experienced personnel.
SIAE installation instructions have been written for such a personnel. Antenna system should be inspected
once a year by qualified personnel to verify proper installation, maintenance and condition of equipment.
SIAE disclaims any liability or responsibility for the results of improper or unsafe installation practices.
ALFOplus equipment is a full-outdoor IP Ethernet radio link system, for transport capacity up to 500 Mbit/
s, designed to establish LAN-LAN connections. For the details related to the actual used frequency band
refer to the label on the equipment.
The system is provided with an integrated antenna; however, in case integrated antenna is not used, it
should be connected to an antenna conforming to the requirements of ETSI EN 302 217-4-2 for the relevant frequency band.
Warning This equipment makes use of non-harmonized frequency bands.

Warning Class 2 radio equipment subject to Authorisation of use. The equipment can operate only at the
frequencies authorised by the relevant National Authority.

Warning The deployment and use of this equipment shall be made in agreement with the national regula-
tion for the Protection from Exposure to Electromagnetic Field.

Warning The symbol
indicates that, within the European Union, the product is subject to separate collection at the product end-of-life. Do not dispose of these products as unsorted municipal waste. For more
information, please contact the relevant supplier for verifying the procedure of correct disposal.
MN.00273.E - 004
85
8.2
GENERAL
The ALFOplus radio system is made up of an outdoor unit, protected by a metallic shield.
Compliance to electromagnetic compatibility is guaranteed through the following precautionary measures:
during the design phase

-
use of protection circuits against electrical dischargers
use of filters on the power supply input circuits against noise propagating on the power supply
wires
during the installation phase

-
use of shielded cables
use of ground connections.
The installation phases of the whole system are described in the following paraghaphs and it must be done
only by service person suitably trained.
Attention: Remember that the whole radio link can work only if ODUs, chosen for local and remote side,
have equal subband and different Tx module (H and L).
8.3
ELECTRICAL WIRING
The electrical wiring must be done using appropriate cables thus assuring the equipment responds to the
electromagnetic compatibility standards.
The cable terminates to flying connectors which have to be connected to the corresponding connectors on
the equipment front.
Position and pin-out of the equipment connectors are available in this section.
8.4
CONNECTIONS TO THE SUPPLY MAINS
During the final installation, protect the ODU by a magneto-thermal switch (not supplied with the equipment), whose characteristics must comply with the laws in force in ones country.
The disconnection from the supply mains is made disconnecting the auxiliary connector M12P5 from the
ODU or disconnecting the LAN PoE cable.
The typical magneto thermal switch has characteristics at least 48Vdc @1.5A with overcurrent relay class
C or K tripping curve.
Seal the auxiliary power connector when the radio is powered via PoE, in order to avoid the removal of the
cover without tools.
86
MN.00273.E - 004
8.5
GROUNDING CONNECTION
Fig.33 and annexed legend show how to perform the grounding connections.
Indoor
ODU
unit
1
IDU
unit
(+) (-)
Station
ground
Local
ground
ground
rack
Legend
1. IDU grounding point, copper faston type. The cross section area of the cable used must be 4 sq.
mm. The Faston is available on the IDU both sides.
2. ODU grounding M6 bolt copper faston type. The cross section area of the cable used must be 16
sq. mm (V60052)
3. IDUODU interconnection cable.
4. Grounding cable (ICD00072F) kit type cable copper or copper alloy to connect the shield of interconnection cable.
5. Battery grounding point of IDU to be connected to earth by means of a cable with a section area
2.5 sq. mm. Length 10 m.
6. Grounding cords connected to a real earth internal of station. The cross section area of the cable
must be 16 sq. mm
Fig.33 - Grounding connection
8.5.1
Mounting instructions of grounding cable kit ICD00072F (universal - no tools)
Follow the procedure. See Tab.20.
MN.00273.E - 004
87
Tab.20 - Mounting Instructions

Description
Remove the cable jacket by 30mm width approximately.

Take care not to damage the copper conductor. Clean
and dry the application area.
Remove the protective film from the butyle sealing

paste.
Put the contact in position on the cable, by firmly pressing on the cable jacket, checking the adherence of the
butyle sealing paste. The contact is firmly positioned on
the cable jacket.
Wrap the copper mesh around the contact and outer

conductor (at least 4 revolutions).
Block the mesh terminal under the contact tooth.
Cut the exceeding mesh length.
Remove the self-agglomerating tape protective film.

Carefully wrap tight the tape around contact and cable,
following the suitable mean line.
Tape adheres remaining in position and progressively
self-agglomerates.
Connect the earthing cable.
88
MN.00273.E - 004
8.6
REQUIRED TOOLS FOR MOUNTING (NOT SUPPLIED)
N.2 13mm torque wrench
N.1 15 mm torque wrench
N.1 17 mm torque wrench
N.1 3 mm Allen wrench.
8.7
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
Installation procedure proceeds according to the following steps:
According to polarization (vertical or horizontal), assemble the antenna and support bracket.
Attention: These instructions are fully detailed in a separate manual Antennas - Code: MN.00249.E
depending on the type of used antenna.
Installation of the ODU
Installation onto the pole of the supporting bracket
ODU grounding.
8.7.1
Standard coupling kit
The standard coupling kit is mounted on ALFOplus by means of four screws.
Coupling kit assembly procedure

See Fig.34 - Put the standard coupling kit on the ODU. Align the four holes of the coupling kit with the four
nut screws on the ODU. Insert and tighten the four screws.
8.8
INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE ODU WITH INTEGRATED ANTENNA
8.8.1
ODU (Standard Lock)
Mounting kit 1+0 version
Centring ring and relevant screws
M10 bolts
ODU with O-ring and devices for ground connection
MN.00273.E - 004
89
Centring ring and relevant screws
M10 bolts for hybrid and ODU mounting
Hybrid mechanical body
Polarization twist disk (see Fig.36)
2 ODUs with O-rings and devices for ground connection.
8.8.1.1
1+0 ODU with integrated antenna
Install the antenna using the antenna installation guide (specific for each antenna) inside the antenna box
provided by antenna producer. Keep attention to the polarization of the antenna feeder depending on requested polarization.
After the antenna is installed onto the pole, the ODU must be installed, see Fig.35.
Position the three holes circular flange (1) on the antenna flange and align the three holes on the
circular flange with the three relevant holes on the antenna flange
Insert and tighten the three 3mm M4 Allen screws (2) using a 3mm Allen wrench (torque = 2 Nm)
Screw partially the four M10 bolts (3) on the antenna back plate: each bolt should be tightened to
have the square head out of the hole of about 13-14mm (the thickness of hook, use 15mm spanner)
Apply seal and lubricant grease Dow Corning 4 to the O-ring, protecting fingers with gloves, and
insert in the proper track on the ODU flange
Position the ODU vertically near the four bolts on the antenna flange and align the ODU to match
the polarization of the antenna feeder:
-
vertical polarization: the handle of the ODU is at the bottom left corner
horizontal polarization: the handle of the ODU is at the bottom right corner
After the right position has been found, rotate 30 counter clockwise the ODU and approach the
ODU to the antenna flange in order to have the four slots of the Standard Lock cross between the
four bolts
Rotate 30 clockwise the ODU to hook each slots on the relevant bolt
When each slot is firmly hooked on the relevant bolt, tighten each bolt (use 15mm spanner,
torque=46mm)
Optional: sun cover kit - Insert the sun cover and tie one of its bottom holes to the ODU handle by
means of the black plastic strip included in the sun cover kit
The ODU is ready to be connected to the grounding cable and to the LAN cable.
Attention: Leave 25 cm straight Lan cable between Amphenol connector and first bending to secure waterproof IPx5.
8.8.1.2
1+1 ODU with integrated antenna
Install the antenna using the antenna installation guide (specific for each antenna) inside the antenna box
by antenna producer.
Keep attention to the polarization of the antenna feeder depending on requested polarization.
After the antenna has been installed onto the pole, follow the procedure below, see Fig.37
Mounting the hybrid (1) on the back of the antenna:
90
Position the three holes circular flange on the antenna flange and align the holes on the circular
flange with the relevant holes on the antenna flange
Insert and tighten the three 3mm M4 Allen screws using a 3mm Allen wrench (torque = 2mm)
MN.00273.E - 004
Prepare the polarization disk (see Fig.36) with the two O-rings: seal and lubricant grease Dow Corning 4 must be applied to the O-ring, protecting fingers with gloves; each O-ring must be inserted in
the proper track on each surface of the disk
Move the marking reference, present on the twister disk, to H or V label of the hybrid flange (antenna side), to set the polarization, as shown in Fig.36 and tighten the four screws (torque value as
in Tab.21)
Mount the hybrid on the back of the antenna tightening four M10 bolts (2) with crossed method
(first bolt on high position left, second bolt on the opposite side following the diagonal, then do the
same with the other two bolts (see Fig.37)
Mounting each ODU on the hybrid:
screw partially four 25 mm M10 bolts positioning them in the holes (3) on the hybrid flange (ODU
side): each bolt should be tightened to have the square head out of the hole of about 13-14 mm,
use 15mm spanner
Apply seal and lubricant grease Dow Corning 4 to the O-ring, protecting fingers with gloves and insert in the proper track on the ODU flange
the polarization of the antenna feeder: horizontal polarization must be used, the handle of the OU
is at the bottom right corner
After the right position has been found, rotate 30 counter clockwise the ODU and approach it to
the antenna flange in order to have the four slots of the Standard Lock cross between the four bolts
on the hybrid
When each slot is firmly hooked on the relevant bolt, tighten each bolt (use 15 mm spanner, torque
= 46 Nm)
Optional: sun cover kit - insert the sun cover and tie one of its bottom holes to the ODU handle by
means of the block plastic strip included in the sun cover kit
Now the ODU is ready to be connected to the grounding cable and to the Lan cable
Attention: Leave 25 cm straight Lan cable between Amphenol connector and first bending to secure waterproof IPX5
Repeat for the other ODU on the other side.

Tab.21 - Torques for tightening screws
Frequencies
Screw
Tool
Torque
from 18 to 38 GHz
Allen screw M3
Allen key 2.5 mm
1 Nm
up to 15 GHz
Allen screw M4
Allen key 3 mm
1 Nm
MN.00273.E - 004
91
8.9
INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE ODU WITH SEPARATED ANTENNA
Diameter of the pole
8.9.1
60-114 mm
ODU (Standard Lock)
Supporting plate, fixing bracket with M10 130mm bolts (with washer, spring and nut)
1 antenna side flange, variable as function of RF frequency, with relevant screws
M10 25mm bolts for ODU mounting
ODU with O-ring and devices for ground connection
Supporting plate, fixing bracket with M10 130mm bolts (with washer, spring and nut)
M10 25mm bolts for hybrid and ODUs mounting
Hybrid mechanical body
Polarization twist disk (see Fig.36)
2 ODUs with O-rings and devices for ground connection.
8.9.1.1
1+0 ODU with separated antenna
See Fig.38.
92
Position the supporting plate (1) on the pole and fix the rear bracket (2) to it by means of the four
130 mm M10 bolt (3) with relevant washers, springs and nuts (use 15mm spanner, torque =
46Nm).
Fix the antenna side flange (4) with the proper screws (in Fig.38 the antenna flange is shown in two
different positions depending on the polarization), the screw holes side is the side where the waveguide must be installed.
On the supporting plate, on the opposite side respect to the antenna flange just mounted, insert in
holes (5) on the supporting plate the four 25mm M10 bolts (3): screw them partially, each bolt
should be tightened to have the square head out of the hole of about 13-14 mm (the thickness of
hook (4), use 15mm spanner).
insert it in the proper track on the ODU flange.
Position the ODU vertically near the four bolts on the supporting plate and align the ODU to match
the polarization of the antenna flange:
-
vertical polarization: the handle of the ODU is at the bottom left corner
horizontal polarization: the handle of the ODU is at the bottom right corner
After the right position has been found, rotate 30 counter clockwise the ODU and approach the
ODU to the supporting plate in order to have the four slots of the Standard Lock cross between the
four bolts
MN.00273.E - 004
=46 Nm)
Optional: sun cover kit - Insert the sun cover and tie one of its bottom holes to the ODU handle by
The ODU is ready to be connected to the grounding cable and to the Lan cable
8.9.1.2
1+1 ODU with separated antenna
See Fig.39.
Position the supporting plate (1) on the pole and fix the rear bracket (2) to it by means of the four
130 mm M10 bolt (3) with relevant washers, springs and nuts (use 15 mm spanner, torque = 46
Nm)
Move the marking reference, present on the twister disk, to H or V label of the hybrid flange (antenna side), to set the polarization as shown in Fig.36 and tighten the four screws (torque value as
in Tab.21)
Mount the hybrid on the supporting plate (1), tightening four M10 bolts (5) with method cross (first
bolt on high left position, second bolt on opposite side following the diagonal, then do the same with
the other two bolts (see Fig.39)
Mounting each ODU on the hybrid:
Screw partially four 25 mm M10 bolts positioning them in the holes (7) on the hybrid flange (ODU
side): each bolt should be tightened to have the square head out of the hole of about 13-14 mm,
use 15 mm spanner
insert in the proper track on the ODU flange
the polarization of the antenna feeder: horizontal polarization must be used, the handle of the ODU
is at the bottom right corner
After the right position has been found, rotate 30 counter clockwise the ODU and approach it to
the antenna flange in order to have the four slots of the Standard Lock cross between the four bolts
on the hybrid
= 46 Nm)
Optional: sun cover kit - insert the sun cover and tie one of its bottom holes to the ODU handle by
Now the ODU is ready to be connected to the grounding cable and to the Lan cable
Repeat for the other ODU on the other side
8.9.1.3
Waveguide towards the antenna
After having installed the ODU in 1+0 configuration or in 1+1 configuration, the waveguide towards the
antenna must be installed.
1+0: the waveguide must be fixed to the antenna flange on the supporting plate of the ODU. In
case of flexible waveguides, an excessive folding can damage the waveguide, see Tab.22 for details.
1+1: the waveguide must be fixed to the hybrid. In case of flexible waveguides, an excessive folding
can damage the waveguide, see Tab.22 for details.
MN.00273.E - 004
93
8.10
GROUNDING
The ODU must be connected to ground with the available grounding bolt and eyelet terminal, making reference to details of Fig.34.
Tab.22 - Waveguide bending radius according to frequency
Frequency
a.
Bending radius with- Bending radius with- Bending radius with Bending radius with
out rebending
out rebending
rebending
rebending
mm (inch)
mm (inch)
mm (inch)
mm (inch)
E-plane a
H-plane b
E-plane a.
H-plane b.
15 GHz
130 (5,1)
280 (11,0)
150 (5,9)
300 (11,9)
18 GHz
130 (5,1)
280 (11,0)
150 (5,9)
300 (11,9)
23 GHz
110 (4,3)
230 (9,1)
130 (5,1)
250 (9,9)
38 GHz
80 (3,1)
140 (5,5)
90 (3,6)
150 (5,9)
Bending E-plane
Rmin/E
Bending E-plane
(short side of the section)
b.
Bending H-plane
Rmin/H
Bending H-plane
(long side of the section)
94
MN.00273.E - 004
O-ring
Coupling kit
Fig.34 - ODU with standard coupling kit
MN.00273.E - 004
95
Fig.35 - 1+0 ODU installation
96
MN.00273.E - 004
Reference
Fig.36 - Polarization disk
MN.00273.E - 004
97
Fig.37 - 1+1 ODU installation
98
MN.00273.E - 004
114-60
3
1
4
5
4
Fig.38 - 1+0 antenna flange
MN.00273.E - 004
99
7
4
3
Fig.39 - 1+1 antenna flange
100
MN.00273.E - 004
8.11
USER CONNECTORS
ALFOplus provides an auxiliary connector and 2 types of Amphenol connector, which guarantee Ethernet
port compatibility for both version: Gigabit electrical and optical.
8.11.1
Auxiliary connector
The auxiliary 5 pin circulator connector has various functions and it is used when:
the Power over Ethernet injector through the data Lan cable is not available or as additional power
supply source (48Vdc in 1+1 configuration)
during the alignment of antenna (remember to enable received signal strength indicator in
Equipment menu - General preset RSSI.
It is recommended after the alignment to set RSSI as Disable not to overload CPU.
In case of emergency, if ALFOplus IP address is unknown, connect it with serial console (F03594),
as shown in Fig.56 using hyperterminal 115200 8, N, 1 and press any button o access in the login
The available auxiliary cables already assembled:
F03594 cable for laboratory use only (see Fig.56)
F03608 2xM12 5P pointing cable (remove it after commissioning pointing) (see Fig.57)
Tab.23 - Auxiliary power cable
SIAE code
Descriptions
P04185
Female 5 pin M12 shielded connector
M10154
Outdoor power supply cable

2x0.75mmq for distance 100m
M10166
Outdoor power supply cable

2x1.5mmq for distance 200m
MN.00273.E - 004
View
101
Assembly steps for M12 male/female connector and conductor

a= slide on parts
b= strip conductor, widen shield and lay around the shielding ring, cuf off projecting mesh. Slide cores
through the housing. mount shielding ring, gasket and clamping cage. Tighten pressure screw to fix the
cable. Screw down cores. Mount male/female part. Tighten pressure screw.
Fig.40 - Functional drawing
Schematic diagram
Fig.41 - Cable connection side M12 (screw connection)
Fig.42 - Pin assignment M12 socket, 5-pos., A-coded, socket side view
102
MN.00273.E - 004
Fig.43 - Dimensioned drawing - M12 connector

Tab.24 - Pinout M12 connector
8.11.2
Pinout
Description
Vdc (-) = -48 Volts
Vdc (+) = 0 Volts
Rx_Console
Tx_Console
GND_Console
Shield
Ground
RJ45 connector
The electrical RJ45 connection to ALFOplus is guaranteed only with coded connector; do not use other modalities of connectors.
Part to be assembled (see Tab.25)
Tab.25 - Part to be assembled
SIAE code
Description
P20032
Amphenol kit RJ45 shielded full outdoor connector
M02472
Data cable CAT5e for outdoor
MN.00273.E - 004
View
103
SIAE code
Description
M05184
Indoor RJ45 boot protection black

F=6mm
P03192
Indoor RJ45 unshielded plug
P20051
Outdoor RJ45 shielded
View
1000Base-T Gigabit Ethernet cables and connectors

Please be aware that modifying Ethernet cables improperly may cause loss of network connectivity. Please
follow colours of wiring.
Fig.44 - T-568A Straight-Through Ethernet cable
104
MN.00273.E - 004
Fig.45 - RJ-45 Pinout
Fig.46 - Indoor RJ45 unshielded assembly
LAN Cable connector - P20032 - Assembly procedure for RJ sealed connectors

Procedure to be used for terminating and assembling of Amphenol Connector Kit
Fig.47
Step 1
Feed CAT cable through boot and connector housing as shown below.
MN.00273.E - 004
105
Warning: Care should be taken not to damage the rubber sealing gasket inside the rear of the connector
housing.
Fig.48
Step 2
Terminate RJ-45 connector onto CAT cable
Strip jacketing and shield as shown
Fold shield back onto jacketing. Wrap grain wire

one and a half times around the shield. Trim excess length from drain wire
Untwist pairs and arrange to desired order.

Note: it is recommended to follow TIA-568 specifications for wiring orientation
Trim conductors at an angle and insert into the
loading bar
Trim excess wire from holder

Insert prepared cable into RJ-45 Plug
106
MN.00273.E - 004
Bend strain relief to lay along cable
Crimp plug and strain relief
Fig.49
MN.00273.E - 004
107
ALIGN THE KEYS AND

PUSH
KEY ODU CONNECTOR
Fig.50 - Cable connector keys
Step 3
Insert terminated RJ-45 plug into connector housing.
While holding the connector body, pull cable through connector housing until RJ plus is near to the housing.
Align the plug latch with the connector housing keyway.
Depress Plug latch and completely insert the RJ plug into the housing.
108
MN.00273.E - 004
Fig.51 -
Step 4
Attach and tighten sealing boot using a 19mm wrench.
Recommended tightening torque is 5.5 to 6.0 (in-lbs) or 0.62 to 0.68 (N-m)
Fig.52
MN.00273.E - 004
109
Fig.53 - PO0032
110
MN.00273.E - 004
OK
NO
Fig.54 - Connector positions

Warning: Tighten all unused connectors with the appropriate cover.
MN.00273.E - 004
111
Tighten strongly LAN

connectors by hands
to ensure the
complete isolaon
P04185 (connector M12 female 5p shelded)
Outdoor LAN connector

(LAN1-LAN2) P20032
Cable M10154 (Outdoor power supply

cable 2x0.75mmq)
Fig.55
8.11.3
112
Optical connector
Cable characteristics
see Tab.26 and Fig.59, Fig.60, Fig.61
Operating temperature range
-40 C to +85C
Protection class
IP67
MN.00273.E - 004
Tab.26 - List of Amphenol optical cable

Connector End/End
Length (m)
Type Mode
SIAE Code
SFP LC/LC
100
Single Mode
P20046
SFP LC/LC
50
Single Mode
P20045
SFP LC/LC
25
Single Mode
P20044
SFP LC/LC
2.5
Single Mode
P20053
SFP LC/OPEN END
2.5
Single Mode
P20043
SFP LC/SFP LC
2.5
Single Mode
P20047
SFP LC/LC
100
Multi Mode
P20037
SFP LC/LC
75
Multi Mode
P20050
SFP LC/LC
50
Multi Mode
P20036
SFP LC/LC
35
Multi Mode
P20049
SFP LC/LC
25
Multi Mode
P20035
SFP LC/LC
15
Multi Mode
P20048
SFP LC/LC
2.5
Multi Mode
P20052
SFP LC/OPEN END
2.5
Multi Mode
P20034
SFP LC/SFP LC
2.5
Multi Mode
P20038
8.11.4
Optical SFP mounting procedure
Follow the instructions:
plug the SFP module into LC embedded connectors until Click (see Fig.62)
insert plugged SFP on ALFOplus optical cage (see Fig.63)
lock the connector by turning the nut (see Fig.64).
8.11.5
Optical SFP unmounting procedure
Follow the instructions:
unlock the connector by untightening the nut
eject SFP module from ALFOplus Optical cage
to unplug thr SFP from LC connector, push the locking by keeping a finger below the SFP module
(see Fig.65).
MN.00273.E - 004
113
Fig.56 - F03594 cable for laboratory use only
114
MN.00273.E - 004
2-3
2-2
2-1
8 RED
1-2
1-3
3-A1
3-A3
WHITE/BROWN
WHITE/GREEN
WHITE/BLUE
BLUE
ORANGE
WHITE/ORANGE
GREEN
BROWN
4 BLACK
3-A2
1-5
2-5
2-4
COLOURS
TO
FROM
COURSE
F03594
THERMOFIT
PIPE
THERMOFIT
PIPE
THERMOFIT
PIPE
THERMOFIT
PIPE
4
BLACK
V+
V-
RED
A1
A2
A3
Fig.57 - F03608 cable for pointing (remove it after commission pointing)
MN.00273.E - 004
115
WIRES CONNECTION
SIDE ENLARGED VIEW
Part
Ref.
*1
WHITE/BLUE
BLUE
CF1-3
CF1-4
CF1-5
TO
CM2-3
CM2-4
CM2-5
FROM
COURSE
WHITE/ORANGE + ORANGE
CF1-2
CM2-2
COLOURS
WHITE/GREEN
WHITE/BROWN+ BROWN
CF1-1
CM2-1
Part
Ref.
N.B. - PART MUST BE LABELLED WITH HOT TIGHTENING RING, DISPLAYING:

- PART NUMBER/REVISION;
- MANUFACTURER ID (REG. MARK OR INITIAL);
- MANUFACTURING DATE (WEEK/YEAR);
- ELECTRICAL TEST PROVEN ("TE" MARK).
CM2
*3 RED
TO
*2 BLACK
COURSE
FROM
CF1-5
CF1-4
35
NOTES
06 mm (Green)
0,6 mm (Blue)
N.B.1
N.B.1
60
4
N.B.2
N.B.2
5
3
BLACK
RED
N.B.2
WIRES CONNECTION
SIDE ENLARGED VIEW
N.B.1 - STRIP THE CABLE RESPECTING THE DIMENSION SHOW IN THE DRAWING
N.B.2 - CABLE HEAT SHRINKABLE
F -----
see N.B.
+20
0 - GET VALUE FROM LAST DIGITS OF PART DESCRIPTION
1530
CF1
Fig.58 - ALFOplus connectors
Fig.59 - SFP LC/LC
Fig.60 - SFP LC/OPEN END
116
MN.00273.E - 004
Fig.61 - SFP LC/ SFP LC
Fig.62 - LC connector
Fig.63 - SFP into ALFOplus
MN.00273.E - 004
117
Fig.64 - Locked connection
Fig.65 - Unplug SFP
118
MN.00273.E - 004
Section 4.
LINE-UP
LINE-UP OF ALFOPLUS SYSTEM
9.1
GENERAL
The line-up consists of the following steps:
switch on the equipment
alarm leds check
optimizing antenna orientation
insertion into telecontrol and reachability of far-end terminal
check of Ethernet connections
quality evaluation with performance monitoring
Operations involving the use of SCT/WebLCT are roughly described here. For further details please refer
to software manual.
9.2
SWITCH ON
Checks to be performed before switching on the unit are:
check external power supply voltage
antenna presence - check the connection between ODU output flange and antenna.
If everything is correct, switch on the ODU.
MN.00273.E - 004
119
9.3
ALARM LED CHECK
On the rear panel of ODU unit there is a transparent plastic window to see the status of an internal LED
dedicated to show unit alarms. Further information about ALFOplus alarms can be found onto the chapter
ALFOplus alarms and troubleshooting.
Colours status:
Red light
-
ON An internal alarm is active. Connect SCT/WebLCT for troubleshooting
Flashing An external alarm is active.
Green light
-
Flashing No radio connection with remote ODU. In this case, if remote equipment is on and
properly oriented, it is necessary to check frequency, attenuation and link identifier (see parag.
First configuration.....) and to evaluate the alarm list with SCT/WebLCT software
ON the radio connection with remote ODU is active.
9.4
CONNECTION PROCEDURE
Connection between PC and ALFOplus can be made directly or through a switch. Connect the PC to ALFOplus in LAN2 connector and start the communication toward the ODU microcontroller with SCT/WebLCT
program.
First connection (you know IP address)

1. with SCT or browser (internet explorer) type IP address stored previously (Factory Default are
172.20.254.14 ODU L and 172.20.255.15 ODU H)
-
User: system
Password: siaemicr
2. after connection its possible to modify IP address, etc.....
Rescue connection (you dont know IP address)

1. Assign a static IP address (see Fig.66) to PC (the IP must belong to the rescue network)
ALFOplus rescue IP address: 173.20.253.13
ALFOplus rescue subnetwork mask: 255.255.0.0
2. Connect your PC directly to ALFOplus with a LAN direct cable
3. By SCT, connect using Local Area Network, press connect button, type in equipment IP address
172.20.253.13 user: System, Password: siaemicr and press RESCUE button (see Fig.67)
4. Follow the instructions of rescue login (see Fig.68)
5. In Rescue Connection mode it is possible to set or recover the values for management access.
120
MN.00273.E - 004
Fig.66 - IP address setting
Fig.67 - Local area connection
MN.00273.E - 004
121
Fig.68 - Rescue login
9.5
FIRST CONFIGURATION
To activate a radio link it is necessary to program the ODU (local and remote side) in some basic items
listed in the following:
modulation & capacity
Tx frequency & power
port configuration
agent IP address and equipment ID
store routing table
remote element list
restart equipment
Bandwidth and Modulation setting

See Fig.69.
Into WebLCT at position:
Equipment menu
Equipment - BW & MOD/LINK ID
In Capacity and Modulation card, you can select Bandwidth&Modulation desired. Press Apply
and Confirm
Enable or disable ACM Engine, if you want dynamic modulation. Press Apply and Confirm
Attention: Use the same parameters on remote unit.
122
MN.00273.E - 004
Fig.69 - Bandwidth&Modulation, Local Link ID
Tx frequency setting
See Fig.70. Into WebLCT at position:
Equipment menu
Radio Branch
Settings card: in this card you have to select Duplex frequency and Tx frequency; Rx frequency
value is shown in the top status bar and is set automatically. Press Apply and Confirm.
Tx frequency to be set at remote radio is equal to local Rx frequency. Please set the frequency according
to your license.
Attention: Remember that the whole radio link can work only if ODUs chosen for local and remote side have
equal sub-band and different Tx module (example of permissible pair ODU 1H and ODU 1L).
Tx power setting
See Fig.70. Into WebLCT at position:
Equipment menu
Radio Branch
Powers card: in this card you have to set maximum Tx power; in this card it is possible to enable
automatic transmission and set ATPC thresholds: Rx Level Min, Rx Level Max. Press Apply and Confirm.
Attention: Use the same parameters at remote ODU.
MN.00273.E - 004
123
Fig.70 - Frequency and power setting
Port configuration setting

See Fig.71.
124
Equipment menu
Main - Port configuration
In Ethernet card you can modify the IP address, netmask and supervisioning parameters. Press
Apply and Confirm. Press Store and Confirm.
MN.00273.E - 004
Fig.71 - Port configuration
Agent IP address setting

See Fig.72.
Equipment menu
Main - Equipment properties
In General Info card, change the equipment ID and agent IP address equal to Ethernet IP address. Press Apply and Confirm.
Fig.72 - Equipment properties
MN.00273.E - 004
125
Remote element list setting

See Fig.73.
Into WebLCT at right position:
Press the button to expand Remote Element List window
Clear and Apply new list
Add station, type SIAE LINK and press OK
Select the station just created and add local element:

-
IP address: type local radio IP address
type of element: managed by SCT
Press OK, Apply and Confirm.
Add remote element:

-
IP address: type remote radio IP address
Type of element: Remote link
Press OK, Apply and Confirm.
Restart equipment
See Fig.73.
Equipment menu
Main - Equipment properties
Press the button Restart Equipment and Confirm.
Fig.73 - Remote element list
126
MN.00273.E - 004
9.6
OPTIMIZING ANTENNA ALIGNMENT WITH RX MEASUREMENT
When the whole radio link is on, antenna alignment can be optimised. Antenna alignment optimization is
performed depending on the Rx signal power at local and remote equipment and evaluating both local and
remote S/N value maximizing them.
There are two possibilities to see the Rx signal power level:
through WebLCT interface
through a voltmeter connected to Auxiliary connector on the ODU (F03608 cable - see Fig.57).
In order to get the Rx signal power level by means of software, connect the PC to serial input of ALFOplus
(LAN2) and start the communication towards the ODU microcontroller with SCT/WebLCT supervisory program.
Into WebLCT is shown in the top status bar (Rx1A=-value dBm) see Fig.73.
If youre using a voltmeter the Rx signal power level is available on the auxiliary connector of ODU, the
measurement can be performed with a proper cable (see Fig.57).
Following this last procedure, the voltage youre reading with the voltmeter is proportional to Rx power
level, refer to Tab.27.
Tab.27 - Voltage measured in auxiliary port
Received Signal (dBm)
Signal Output (V)
Error (dB)
-20
4.68
-30
3.51
-40
2.34
-50
1.17
-60
-70
-1.17
-80
-2.34
-90
-3.51
-100
-4.68
Formula
RSSI=Offset + (Signal/Output)/Slope
Slope (V/dB)
0.117
Offset (dBm)
-60
Typical Rx signal power level: -40dBm. It is the most important item to optimise the antenna alignment,
but in a situation of interference Rx level can be good, BER acceptable but BER margin low. This means
that when Rx fields will decrease then BER will increase fast. The situation can be easily shown with SCT/
WebLCT software looking at Signal Quality level.
Into WebLCT Software select:
Equipment menu
Maintenance
S/N Meas. card (see Fig.75)
Refer to the ALFOplus operator manual for parameter evaluation.
MN.00273.E - 004
127
Fig.74 - Main menu with Rx signal power level
Fig.75 - S/N measurement monitoring
Antenna aiming
Antenna aiming devices allow to perform the following adjustments with respect to the starting aiming position:
-
horizontal
15 operating on the nut (3) shown in Fig.76, only after having loosen
the nuts (7), (8), (9), (10) of Fig.77.
vertical
15 operating on vertical adjustment worm screw (2) shown in Fig.76

only after having loosen nuts (1), (2), (11) of Fig.77 and (4) of Fig.76
For adjustment from 0 to +30 extract nut (1) Fig.77 and position it in
hole (4), extract nut (2) Fig.77 and position it in hole (6). Operate on
vertical adjustment worm screw (2) after having loosen nuts (1), (2), (11) of
Fig.77 and (4) of Fig.76.
For adjustment from 0 to 30 extract nut (1) of Fig.77 and position it in hole
(3), extract nut (2) of Fig.77 and position it in hole (5). Operate on vertical
adjustment worm screw (2) after having loosen nuts (1), (2), (11) of Fig.77
and (4) of Fig.76.
For vertical adjustment some markers, every 10, are available on support. The bigger marker gives 0
starting aiming position. Once the optimum aiming position is obtained, tighten firmly the four nuts (1),
(2), (11) of Fig.77 and (4) of Fig.76 for vertical adjustment and the four nuts (7), (8), (9), (10) of Fig.77
for horizontal adjustment. Tighten with 15 mm wrench and 32 Nm torque.
128
MN.00273.E - 004
grounding
The grounding can be connected with the available bolt spring washer and
flat washers as shown.
4
5
Fig.76 - Vertical and horizontal adjustment
MN.00273.E - 004
129
15 mm wrench
32 Nm torque
15 mm wrench
32 Nm torque
11
10
9
5
15 mm wrench
32 Nm torque
15 mm wrench
32 Nm torque
Fig.77 - Antenna aiming block
9.7
ODU ACCESSING AND REMOTE MANAGEMENT
Local ALFOplus ODU and its remote ODU can be accessed at LAN2 or LAN1 ports (depending on supervisioning parameters). Once the radio link has been configured, connect to the local ODU and specify the
network password too. SCT/WebLCT window shows also a field referred to the remote ODU:
double click on this field -> remote ODU is opened in monitor mode
if its necessary to act on remote ODU you have to login on remote ODU (IP address is known because you can read it from monitor windows).
If the remote element list has been done correctly, into WebLCT software press button Open Far End to
open and manage the Remote Radio window.
130
MN.00273.E - 004
9.8
COMMISSIONING MEASURES FOR ETHERNET TRAFFIC
9.8.1
Ethernet connection stability
Settings
To verify the Ethernet performances set the equipment following Tab.28
Tab.28 - Ethernet connection stability
LAN1
LAN2
Interface type
Electrical
Electrical
Rate Control
Full Rate
Full Rate
Flow Control
Disable
Disable
Master/Slave
Master
M/S Autoneg.
LAN2
Electrical
Electrical
Port Enable
Full Rate
Full Rate
Port Enable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Master
Master
Master
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
MAC learning
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Speed/Duplex
Auto (1Gbit)
Auto
(100Mbit)
Auto (1Gbit)
Auto
(100Mbit)
Cable crossover
Auto
Auto
Auto
Auto
LAN1
Disable
Enable
Disable
Enable
LAN2
Disable
Enable
Disable
Enable
Port A
Enable
Enable
Enable
Enable
802.1 Management
Fallback
Disable
Fallback
Fallback
Disable
Fallback
Default Vid
101
102
111
101
102
111
Port default
Port default
Port default
Port default
Priority 802.1P
Ethernet Switch
Remote terminal
LAN1
Port Based VLAN
Vitual Lan (802.1Q)
Lan Setting
Local Terminal
PORT A
Disable
Max Packet size
2048 byte
Mac address
aging time
300 sec
QinQ ETH Type
9100
Priority
Radio to Lan
Priority
LAN to radio
MN.00273.E - 004
PORT A
Disable
Native 802.1p
Native 802.1p
131
9.9
FIRMWARE
The releases of ALFO firmware, downloadable by the operator, are listed in Fig.78.
Using SCT/WebLCT Software open Main menu, select Software info & Maintenance and in the window
shown in Fig.78 select Equipment Firmware and Download SW Setup.
Downloading time depends on connection used between PC and ALFOplus.
Further informations can be found on software manual of ALFOplus equipment.
Fig.78 - Software download procedure
Fig.79 - Upgrade software
132
MN.00273.E - 004
9.10
BACK UP FULL EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION WITHOUT POSSIBILITY OF MODIFYING THE PARAMETERS
9.10.1
Scope
This chapter describes the procedure to back up the full equipment configuration. This permits to recover
the original equipment configuration in case of faulty CONTROLLER module replacement with spare.
9.10.2
Configuration upload and download using SCT
Configuration upload
Foreword: it is advisable to backup the configuration after the first installation. Proceed as follows:
1. Select Equipment Configuration Wizard from menu Tools; Equipment Configuration Wizard window will be displayed.
2. Select Upload and then Backup Full Equipment Configuration; Template Selection window will be displayed.
3. Select the correct equipment template (in case of uncorrected choice the backup will be aborted).
4. Press OK and then select the equipment to be uploaded from Upload Configuration File window.
5. Press OK and then edit the file name from Save backup as window.
6. Press Save; Equipment Configuration Wizard: Complete Backup window will appear.
The window shows dynamically the backup procedure. If everything is OK, at the end of the upload
will appear the word done showing the procedure success.
7. Press OK to finish.
Configuration download
Once the spare controller has been installed, or every time you need the primitive configuration, proceed
as follows:
1. Select Equipment Configuration Wizard from menu Tools. Equipment Configuration Wizard
window will be displayed.
2. Select Download and than Restore Full Equipment Configuration from Equipment Configuration Wizard. Select Backup File window will be displayed.
3. Select the wanted backup file with extension .bku and then press Open. Download Configuration
File window will be displayed.
4. Select the equipment to download and then press OK; Equipment Configuration Wizard: Complete
restore window will be displayed. This window shows dynamically the download operation. The
word done indicates that download has been successfully.
5. Press OK to finish.
Warning: In case of EOC alarm proceed to restart the equipment.
MN.00273.E - 004
133
9.10.3
Configuration upload and download using WEBLCT
Configuration upload
Foreword: it is advisable to backup the configuration after the first installation. Proceed as follows:
1. select Backup/Restore Configuration in the Main menu
2. in the field Backup File name write the name of the configuration file you are going to upload in
the PC, complete with the full path of its folder
3. push Backup. The status of the backup procedure is shown in the Operation Status field.
Configuration download
Once the spare Controller has been installed or every time the saved configuration is necessary, proceed
as follow:
1. Select Backup/Restore Configuration in the Main menu
2. In the field Restore file name write the name of the configuration file you are going to download
in the ODU, complete with the full path of its folder
3. Push Restore. The status of the backup procedure is shown in the operation Status field. During
Restore operation the equipment creates a backup configuration, you can come back to this configuration at the end of the restore pushing Revert (see Fig.80)
Warning: the file full backup, making use of SCT, isnt compatible with WebLCT and vice versa.
Fig.80 - Backup/Restore configuration
134
MN.00273.E - 004
Section 5.
MAINTENANCE
10
ALFOPLUS ALARMS AND LOOPS
10.1
GENERAL
A radio link generating alarm requires troubleshooting.

The troubleshooting of the ALFOplus can be organized on the basis of alarms.
Basic alarms come from LEDs on the equipment and all the active alarms can be observed through SCT/
WebLCT.
In this document is present ALFOplus alarm list and a description of the loop facilities provided into the
equipment.
10.2
ALARMS
Alarms can be pointed out through unit LEDs and/or through SCT/WebLCT software.
10.2.1
Alarm indications
On the rack of the ALFOplus there is a LED that shows the alarm status.
The information provided is:
Red light
-
ON An internal alarm is active. Connect SCT/WebLCT for troubleshooting.
Green light
MN.00273.E - 004
135
properly oriented, it is necessary to evaluate the Alarm list with SCT/WebLCT software.
ON Radio connection with remote ODU is active.
10.2.2
SCT/WebLCT displayed alarms
All the alarms are displayed through SCT/WebLCT program running on a PC. Alarms are divided in groups
to refer to a particular functionality and are characterized by programmable severity.
Alarms, with group and a short description, are listed into Tab.29.
In the following you can find a class list and the item they describe:
COMMON Failure or status relevant to whole equipment
ETH LAN - Failure on Ethernet traffic
P.M. ACM - Performance monitoring on ACM
P.M. G.828 Performance monitoring on signal quality
P.M. Rx Power Performance monitoring on received signal
P.M. Tx Power Performance monitoring on transmitted signal
Plug-in module - Alarm on plug-in device
RADIO - Alarm on Tx/Rx section of ALFOplus
SETS - Synchronisation alarm or status
SNTP - Server lost (unavailable in this SW version)
Unit - Hardware or software unit alarm

Tab.29 - Alarms
Group
COMMON
ETH LAN
P.M. ACM
136
WebLCT name
Description
Equip Rmon Alarm
Statistic Counter Ethernet
Equip Manual Operation
At least one manual operation on
G.8032 Port operating Status Alarm
Ring protection link alarm
OAM FM Fail Alarm
MEP not receiving
OAM FM MEP Configuration Mismatch

Alarm
MEP not configured properly
Eth Lan Phy Lacp Protocol Down
Link aggregation not working
Eth Lan Phy Master Slave Configuration Fault
Autonegotiation GBit Frame configuration

failed
Eth Lan Phy Link Loss Forwarding
Link loss in remote port
Eth Lan Phy Autonegotiation
Autonegotiation failed
Eth Lan Phy Sync
Synchronization not aligned
Eth Lan Phy Link Loss
Loss of Ethernet signal
pm ACM - 24H Alarm

pm ACM - 15H Alarm
ACM measurements on received radio signal
MN.00273.E - 004
pm G828 - 24H SepAlarm

pm G828 - 15M SepAlarm
pm G828 - UAS Alarm
P.M. G.828
pm G828 - 24H Ses Alarm
Quality measurements on radio signal received a
pm G828 - 24H ES Alarm

pm G828 - 15M Ses Alarm
pm G828 - 15M ES Alarm
P.M. Rx Power
P.M. Tx Power
Plug-in module
RADIO
SETS
MN.00273.E - 004
pm RxPwr - 24H Rlts Alarm

pm RxPwr - 15M Rlts Alarm
pm TxPwr - 24H Rlts Alarm
Rx Power measurements on radio signal received a.
pm TxPwr - 15M Rlts Alarm
Tx Power measurements on radio signal

transmitted a.
Plug-in Los Alarm
Loss of Signal on Module
Plug-in Module Alarm
SFP module is missing
Plug-in Module Mismatch Alarm
Wrong SFP module
Plug-in Status Change
SFP module is active
Radio Config Mismatch Set
Mod/Cap mismatch on radio link
Radio Rx Quality Low Warning
Received signal quality degraded
Radio Rx Quality Low Alarm
Insufficient received signal quality
Radio Rx AGC Fail
Automatic gain Control alarmed
Radio Rt Vco Fail
Voltage Controlled Oscillator failure
Radio Tx Power Alarm
Transmitted power below the fixed threshold
Radio Rx Power Low Alarm
Received power below the fixed threshold
Radio Modulation Fail Alarm
Alarm on radio transmitting side
Radio Demodulation Fail Alarm
Alarm on radio receiving side
Radio Rx Alarm Set
Low received power on radio
Radio Invalid Frequency Alarm Set
Wrong frequency on radio link
Radio Equip Ber Sync Loss Alarm
Bit error rate/Syncloss on received radio signal
Radio Equip Reduced Capacity Alarm
Capacity is reduced respect to the one with

reference modulation
Radio Equip Link Telemetry Fail Alarm
Telemetry failed to radio link missing
Radio Equip Link ID Alarm
Wrong Link ID received
Timing Sync Active Status
Timing Sync is active
Timing Sync Drift Alarm
Selected Synch bad quality
Timing Sync Los Alarm
Selected Synch missing
Timing Generator Holdover Status
Equipment in holdover status
Timing Generator Free Running Status
Equipment in Free Running status
Timing Generator T0 Fail Alarm
T0 synch missing
137
SNTP
Unit
a.
138
Sntp Client Unicast Server Lost
Server is missing
Unit SW Mismatch Alarm
SW mismatch detected on the unit
Unit HW Mismatch Alarm
HW mismatch detected on the unit
Unit Not Responding Alarm
No response from the unit
Unit Missing Alarm
Missing condition on the unit
Unit Fail Alarm
Failure on the unit
Regarding periods of 15 minutes or 24 hours.
MN.00273.E - 004
11
ALFOPLUS MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
11.1
GENERAL
In the following pages are listed all the procedures to follow for ALFOplus maintenance.
When corrective maintenance is necessary, a troubleshooting procedure helps the operator to identify the
failure unit to replace it with a spare one.
11.2
MAINTENANCE
Maintenance consists of two stages:

1. periodical checks to be carried out using SCT/WebLCT
2. corrective maintenance.
Periodical checks serve to detect correct radio performance without the presence of any alarm condition.
Corrective maintenance takes place as soon as one or more alarm conditions are in existence. Operation
sequence to be carried out is shown in Troubleshooting paragraph.
11.2.1
Periodical checks
System routine maintenance consists in a series of routine checks aiming to verify correct operating mode
of an alarmfree system.
These checks are made through SCT/WebLCT program, installed on a PC.
The items to be checked are:
Tx power (i.e., attenuation value in dB vs. nominal value)
Rx field (value measured must comply with that resulting from hop calculation)
S/N (presence of possible interference)
BER (values measured must comply with hop calculations)
How these operations are carried out is specified in Lineup section or, more widely, in ALFOplus software
manual.
MN.00273.E - 004
139
11.2.2
Corrective maintenance (troubleshooting)
Corrective maintenance starts as soon as one or more alarm indication become active.
Corrective maintenance purpose is to locate the faulty unit and replace it with spare after having verified
that the cause of faulty is not external to the equipment.
Corrective maintenance does not include malfunction due to a wrong or incomplete configuration of the
system or to failure due to alarm indication system itself or any other cause external to the system, i.e.:
cabling damage, main voltage loss, antenna misalignment and propagation problems.
See paragraph 11.3 TROUBLESHOOTING for details.
11.3
TROUBLESHOOTING
Main purpose of troubleshooting is to declare an unit faulty or not.

After this step alarms are caused by bad configuration and/or external causes.
11.3.1
Faulty condition detection
Alarms can be pointed out through unit LEDs and/or through SCT/WebLCT software:
Unit LEDs
Near the circular connector of the ODU its shown the status of a LED, which can be green or red. The information provided are:
Red light
-
ON An internal alarm is active. Connect SCT/WebLCT for troubleshooting.
Green light
-
properly oriented, it is necessary to evaluate the alarm list with SCT/WebLCT software.
ON Radio connection with remote ODU is active.
SCT/WebLCT
Alarms are divided in classes to refer to a particular hardware or software functionality and are characterized by their programmable gravity.
A window with alarm classes list is available for local ODU (the unit PC is physically connected to) and for
remote ODU.
The presence of a current alarm is pointed out by SCT/WebLCT program, see software manual.
The presence of an historical alarm is pointed out in the event log window of SCT/WebLCT program (see
Fig.81 and Fig.82).
140
MN.00273.E - 004
11.3.2
Troubleshooting of a faulty unit
Into SCT/WebLCT software, in Equipment menu select View Current Alarm menu.
In this window they are displayed the current alarm and their severity. Depending on which alarm classes
are active, following situation can arise.
ODU alarm classes active

ALFOplus is made up by a single unit, the ODU. This is the minimum spare part.
If one or more of the following conditions occur, the ODU is faulty:
One or more alarms inside the ODU hardware class are active
One or more alarms inside ODU link class are active
If the following condition occurs a further investigation is necessary:
Sw config alarm in ODU software class is active

Every log window has to be inspected. In the window are present additional information about Sw
config alarm; if it is impossible to clear through restart, the unit is not able to work properly and
needs to be tested again in SIAE final test department.
Troubleshooting on remote ODU

With SCT/WebLCT program the alarm on the Remote ODU are displayed the same way as for the local one.
The above described troubleshooting can be carried out for the remote ODU too.
Fig.81 - Current alarm monitoring
MN.00273.E - 004
141
Fig.82 - Event log window
142
MN.00273.E - 004
Section 6.
PROGRAMMING AND
SUPERVISION
12
PROGRAMMING AND SUPERVISION
12.1
GENERAL
ALFOplus is programmed and supervised using a software tool: SCT/WebLCT. This subject is fully described
in the separated software manual (WebLCT ALFOplus - Software application for the management of ALFOplus equipment).
12.2
SUPERVISION THROUGH ETHERNET
The provided structure for Ethernet traffic defines the management facilities of "ALFOplus" unit.
MN.00273.E - 004
143
Internal port
Ge LAN1
SWD
Switcing Device
Radio side
Ge LAN2
Mgt
Mac
Controller
Rate adapter
(fpga)
Fig.83 - Traffic management of "ALFOplus" unit
12.2.1
General
In general you suppose that the equipment performs the "host" functionality in an Ethernet network and
that supervisory network follows the traffic routing, eventually separated by "VLAN tag". The management
can be:
Disable
the Management by Ge LAN1 cant get access to the controller
Local Access Only
Ge LAN2 may access only to the access only to the local controller.
Supervisory network is not connected to radio side
In-Band
The management can access to the controller if its configured

with VLAN tag
Out-of-Band
Ge LAN2 can access to local controller and supervisory network is

connected to radio side using VLAN stacking function to separate
the traffic
In-band-drop-node
Ge LAN2 can access to local controller and the port is considered as a

node into the supervisory network in-band (with VLAN tag)
The modalities can be enabled/disabled by software to the LAN1 and LAN2 interface.
Supervisory network can be disable selectively line side and radio site.
Local access to the unit must be always guaranteed by "Ge LAN2".
144
MN.00273.E - 004
12.2.2
Configurations
Possible configurations of supervisioning traffic are shown in Tab.30.

Tab.30 - Configurations
LAN1
LAN2
Internal Port
(Radio side)
Description
Disable
LAO
Disable
Lan1 only payload and Lan2 only local management
Disable
OoB
Disable/OoB
Lan1 only payload and Lan2 only management
In-Band
LAO
Disable/IB
Lan1 Vlan mngt+payload and Lan2 only local management
In-Band
Drop/node
Disable/IB
Lan1 Vlan mngt+payload and Lan2 only management
In-Band
In-Band
Disable
Lan1 Vlan mngt+payload and Lan2 Vlan mngt+payload
In-Band
Disable
Disable/IB
Lan1 Vlanmngt+payload and Lan2 disable
12.2.3
"Local Access only" management
This modality allows the access to "ALFOplus" unit only with the local "Ge LAN2" in the easiest possible
way, with frames without " VLAN tag" and therefore with IP domain shared. This modality can be used if
the user is IP addresses owner and so the equipment is inserted into a traffic network level 3 (IP routing).
For this reason, the Security management is defined by the operator using the function (Access Control
List).
Ge LAN2
CPU
Port based vlan
Fig.84 - Local access only
MN.00273.E - 004
145
12.2.4
"VLAN based in-band" management
This procedure allow the access of "ALFOplus" unit by "Ge LAN1" more safely, because the IP domain is
independent of payload traffic through dedicated "VLAN tag" (configurable). This mode can be used when
the user is owner of "VLAN tag" and the equipment is interposed in a level 2 network traffic (switching).
In that case the management routing is obtain to filtering of "VLAN tag".
Ge LAN1
Ge LAN2

CPU
Vlan map filtering

Fig.85 - VLAN based in-band management
To reduce the visibility of the controller to line side (), radio side () and extent supervision network ()
you can enable or disable the paths indicated in filtering "VLAN tag". The path () can be enabled only if
both line ports, are enabled to "In-band" management.
In case of protection configuration through LAG or ELP, the path () cannot be enabled.
12.2.5
"VLAN based In-band" drop node
This particular way allows to introduce the supervision traffic "VLAN based In-band" (mandatory with
"VLAN tag") using "Ge LAN2" obligatorily without "VLAN tag". The line ports are linked together using the
filtering "VLAN tag" (set as tagged the default port "Ge LAN2").
Ge LAN1
Ge LAN2
MGT

CPU
Vlan map filtering
Port based vlan
Fig.86 - VLAN based In-band drop node

This mode allows the supervision of outdoor units placed in the same site, but excludes the possibility of
simultaneous monitoring "Out-of-band" in the network.
The insertion direction (on the line and radio side) can be selectively enabling or disabling the paths corresponding ( and ). This mode is not available in the case of interfaces in a secure configuration.
146
MN.00273.E - 004
12.2.6
"Out-of-band" management
This mode allows the access to the local "ALFOplus" unit of frame without "VLAN tag" and the extension of
the supervision network to the remote terminal. The priority of management traffic is obtained with "VLAN
tag".
In remote terminal the payload and management traffic are again divided. This involves increasing the
length of traffic frame of four bytes.
Fe LAN2
Fe LAN2
CPU
CPU
Vlan map filtering
Port based vlan
Fig.87 - Out-of-band management
12.2.7
Configurability
The management mode of equipment affects the Ethernet Channel and on the Switch configuration (RSTP,
OAM, ). Therefore it is important to decide the optimal configuration of traffic Ethernet and management,
to avoid blocking traffic conditions.
12.2.8
Address
The unit uses a single IP address associated at the management port of controller and a single "default
gateway". Depending on the configuration of these addresses are visible from supervision "in-band" and
"Out-of-band".
12.2.9
Restore supervisioning access mode
The RESTORE OF CPU ACCESS command is available through Serial port (F03594 cable) via Hyperterminal (115200bps,n,8,1):
Login
SYSTEM
Password
SIAEMICR
Type string:
lao
This string restores the factory default of port configuration:
LAN1
disable
LAN2
local access only
MN.00273.E - 004
147
148
MN.00273.E - 004
Section 7.
COMPOSITION
13
COMPOSITION
13.1
GENERALS
This document shows ALFOplus system available versions with the relevant main specifications and characteristics.
13.2
ALFOPLUS SYSTEM IDENTIFYING LABEL
Different versions are identified by a label. This label contains the main characteristics of the equipment
(see Tab.31).
13.3
AVAILABLE ALFOPLUS VERSIONS
In Tab.31 you find the available versions with following information:
Code
ODU frequency
Go-return
RF Subband (L and H)
MN.00273.E - 004
149
Tab.31 - RF band and RF filter band
150
Code
Description
Go-return (MHz)
RF/Subband
GB 8606
ODU ALFOplus 11
490/530
11 GHz 1L
GB 8607
ODU ALFOplus 11
490/530
11 GHz 1H
GB 8608
ODU ALFOplus 11
490/530
11 GHz 2L
GB 8609
ODU ALFOplus 11
490/530
11 GHz 2H
GB 8610
ODU ALFOplus 11
490/530
11 GHz 3L
GB 8611
ODU ALFOplus 11
490/530
11 GHz 3H
GB 8612
ODU ALFOplus 13
266
13 GHz 1L
GB 8613
ODU ALFOplus 13
266
13 GHz 1H
GB 8614
ODU ALFOplus 13
266
13 GHz 2L
GB 8615
ODU ALFOplus 13
266
13 GHz 2H
GB 8616
ODU ALFOplus 13
266
13 GHz 3L
GB 8617
ODU ALFOplus 13
266
13 GHz 3H
GB 8618
ODU ALFOplus 13
266
13 GHz 4L
GB 8619
ODU ALFOplus 13
266
13 GHz 4H
GB 8628
ODU ALFOplus 15
315/322
15 GHz 1L
GB 8629
ODU ALFOplus 15
315/322
15 GHz 1H
GB 8630
ODU ALFOplus 15
315/322
15 GHz 2L
GB 8631
ODU ALFOplus 15
315/322
15 GHz 2H
GB 8632
ODU ALFOplus 15
315/322
15 GHz 3L
GB 8633
ODU ALFOplus 15
315/322
15 GHz 3H
GB 8634
ODU ALFOplus 15
315/322
15 GHz 4L
GB 8635
ODU ALFOplus 15
315/322
15 GHz 4H
GB 8636
ODU ALFOplus 15
315/322
15 GHz 5L
GB 8637
ODU ALFOplus 15
315/322
15 GHz 5H
GB 8646
ODU ALFOplus 15
420
15 GHz 1L
GB 8647
ODU ALFOplus 15
420
15 GHz 1H
GB 8648
ODU ALFOplus 15
420
15 GHz 2L
GB 8649
ODU ALFOplus 15
420
15 GHz 2H
GB 8650
ODU ALFOplus 15
420
15 GHz 3L
GB 8651
ODU ALFOplus 15
420
15 GHz 3H
GB 8652
ODU ALFOplus 15
420
15 GHz 4L
GB 8653
ODU ALFOplus 15
420
15 GHz 4H
GB 8662
ODU ALFOplus 15
490
15 GHz 1L
GB 8663
ODU ALFOplus 15
490
15 GHz 1H
GB 8664
ODU ALFOplus 15
490
15 GHz 2L
GB 8665
ODU ALFOplus 15
490
15 GHz 2H
MN.00273.E - 004
GB 8666
ODU ALFOplus 15
490
15 GHz 3L
GB 8667
ODU ALFOplus 15
490
15 GHz 3H
GB 8668
ODU ALFOplus 15
490
15 GHz 4L
GB 8669
ODU ALFOplus 15
490
15 GHz 4H
GB 8690
ODU ALFOplus 15
728
15 GHz 1L
GB 8691
ODU ALFOplus 15
728
15 GHz 1H
GB 8700
ODU ALFOplus 18
1010
18 GHz 1L
GB 8701
ODU ALFOplus 18
1010
18 GHz 1H
GB 8702
ODU ALFOplus 18
1010
18 GHz 2L
GB 8703
ODU ALFOplus 18
1010
18 GHz 2H
GB 8704
ODU ALFOplus 18
1010
18 GHz 3L
GB 8705
ODU ALFOplus 18
1010
18 GHz 3H
GB 8716
ODU ALFOplus 18
1560
18 GHz 1L
GB 8717
ODU ALFOplus 18
1560
18 GHz 1H
GB 8718
ODU ALFOplus 23
1008
23 GHz 1L
GB 8719
ODU ALFOplus 23
1008
23 GHz 1H
GB 8720
ODU ALFOplus 23
1008
23 GHz 2L
GB 8721
ODU ALFOplus 23
1008
23 GHz 2H
GB 8726
ODU ALFOplus 23
1200/1232
23 GHz 1L
GB 8727
ODU ALFOplus 23
1200/1232
23 GHz 1H
GB 8728
ODU ALFOplus 23
1200/1232
23 GHz 2L
GB 8729
ODU ALFOplus 23
1200/1232
23 GHz 2H
GB 8730
ODU ALFOplus 23
1200/1232
23 GHz 3L
GB 8731
ODU ALFOplus 23
1200/1232
23 GHz 3H
GB 8736
ODU ALFOplus 25
1008
25 GHz 1L
GB 8737
ODU ALFOplus 25
1008
25 GHz 1H
GB 8738
ODU ALFOplus 25
1008
25 GHz 2L
GB 8739
ODU ALFOplus 25
1008
25 GHz 2H
GB 8782
ODU ALFOplus 38
1260
38 GHz 1L
GB 8783
ODU ALFOplus 38
1260
38 GHz 1H
GB 8784
ODU ALFOplus 38
1260
38 GHz 2L
GB 8785
ODU ALFOplus 38
1260
38 GHz 2H
GB 9524
ODU ALFOplus 7L
196
7L GHz 1L
GB 9525
ODU ALFOplus 7L
196
7L GHz 1H
GB 9526
ODU ALFOplus 7L
196
7L GHz 2L
GB 9527
ODU ALFOplus 7L
196
7L GHz 2H
GB 9528
ODU ALFOplus 7L
196
7L GHz 3L
GB 9529
ODU ALFOplus 7L
196
7L GHz 3H
MN.00273.E - 004
151
152
GB 9534
ODU ALFOplus 7M
154
7M GHz 1L
GB 9535
ODU ALFOplus 7M
154
7M GHz 1H
GB 9536
ODU ALFOplus 7M
154
7M GHz 2L
GB 9537
ODU ALFOplus 7M
154
7M GHz 2H
GB 9538
ODU ALFOplus 7M
154
7M GHz 3L
GB 9539
ODU ALFOplus 7M
154
7M GHz 3H
GB 9540
ODU ALFOplus 7M
154
7M GHz 4L
GB 9541
ODU ALFOplus 7M
154
7M GHz 4H
GB 9550
ODU ALFOplus 7M
168
7M GHz 1L
GB 9551
ODU ALFOplus 7M
168
7M GHz 1H
GB 9552
ODU ALFOplus 7M
168
7M GHz 2L
GB 9553
ODU ALFOplus 7M
168
7M GHz 2H
GB 9554
ODU ALFOplus 7M
168
7M GHz 3L
GB 9555
ODU ALFOplus 7M
168
7M GHz 3H
GB 9612
ODU ALFOplus 13
266
13 GHz 1L
GB 9613
ODU ALFOplus 13
266
13 GHz 1H
GB 9614
ODU ALFOplus 13
266
13 GHz 2L
GB 9615
ODU ALFOplus 13
266
13 GHz 2H
GB 9616
ODU ALFOplus 13
266
13 GHz 3L
GB 9617
ODU ALFOplus 13
266
13 GHz 3H
GB 9618
ODU ALFOplus 13
266
13 GHz 4L
GB 9619
ODU ALFOplus 13
266
13 GHz 4H
GB 9628
ODU ALFOplus 15
315/322
15 GHz 1L
GB 9629
ODU ALFOplus 15
315/322
15 GHz 1H
GB 9630
ODU ALFOplus 15
315/322
15 GHz 2L
GB 9631
ODU ALFOplus 15
315/322
15 GHz 2H
GB 9632
ODU ALFOplus 15
315/322
15 GHz 3L
GB 9633
ODU ALFOplus 15
315/322
15 GHz 3H
GB 9634
ODU ALFOplus 15
315/322
15 GHz 4L
GB 9635
ODU ALFOplus 15
315/322
15 GHz 4H
GB 9636
ODU ALFOplus 15
315/322
15 GHz 5L
GB 9637
ODU ALFOplus 15
315/322
15 GHz 5H
GB 9646
ODU ALFOplus 15
420
15 GHz 1L
GB 9647
ODU ALFOplus 15
420
15 GHz 1H
GB 9648
ODU ALFOplus 15
420
15 GHz 2L
GB 9649
ODU ALFOplus 15
420
15 GHz 2H
GB 9650
ODU ALFOplus 15
420
15 GHz 3L
GB 9651
ODU ALFOplus 15
420
15 GHz 3H
MN.00273.E - 004
GB 9652
ODU ALFOplus 15
420
15 GHz 4L
GB 9653
ODU ALFOplus 15
420
15 GHz 4H
GB 9662
ODU ALFOplus 15
490
15 GHz 1L
GB 9663
ODU ALFOplus 15
490
15 GHz 1H
GB 9664
ODU ALFOplus 15
490
15 GHz 2L
GB 9665
ODU ALFOplus 15
490
15 GHz 2H
GB 9666
ODU ALFOplus 15
490
15 GHz 3L
GB 9667
ODU ALFOplus 15
490
15 GHz 3H
GB 9668
ODU ALFOplus 15
490
15 GHz 4L
GB 9669
ODU ALFOplus 15
490
15 GHz 4H
GB 9690
ODU ALFOplus 15
728
15 GHz 1L
GB 9691
ODU ALFOplus 15
728
15 GHz 1H
GB 9700
ODU ALFOplus 18
1010
18 GHz 1L
GB 9701
ODU ALFOplus 18
1010
18 GHz 1H
GB 9702
ODU ALFOplus 18
1010
18 GHz 2L
GB 9703
ODU ALFOplus 18
1010
18 GHz 2H
GB 9704
ODU ALFOplus 18
1010
18 GHz 3L
GB 9705
ODU ALFOplus 18
1010
18 GHz 3H
GB 9708
ODU ALFOplus 17
144
17 GHz 1L
GB 9709
ODU ALFOplus 17
144
17 GHz 1H
GB 9716
ODU ALFOplus 18
1560
18 GHz 1L
GB 9717
ODU ALFOplus 18
1560
18 GHz 1H
GB 9718
ODU ALFOplus 23
1008
23 GHz 1L
GB 9719
ODU ALFOplus 23
1008
23 GHz 1H
GB 9720
ODU ALFOplus 23
1008
23 GHz 2L
GB 9721
ODU ALFOplus 23
1008
23 GHz 2H
GB 9726
ODU ALFOplus 23
1200/1232
23 GHz 1L
GB 9727
ODU ALFOplus 23
1200/1232
23 GHz 1H
GB 9728
ODU ALFOplus 23
1200/1232
23 GHz 2L
GB 9729
ODU ALFOplus 23
1200/1232
23 GHz 2H
GB 9730
ODU ALFOplus 23
1200/1232
23 GHz 3L
GB 9731
ODU ALFOplus 23
1200/1232
23 GHz 3H
GB 9736
ODU ALFOplus 25
1008
25 GHz 1L
GB 9737
ODU ALFOplus 25
1008
25 GHz 1H
GB 9738
ODU ALFOplus 25
1008
25 GHz 2L
GB 9739
ODU ALFOplus 25
1008
25 GHz 2H
GB 9782
ODU ALFOplus 38
1260
38 GHz 1L
GB 9783
ODU ALFOplus 38
1260
38 GHz 1H
MN.00273.E - 004
153
GB 9784
ODU ALFOplus 38
1260
38 GHz 2L
GB 9785
ODU ALFOplus 38
1260
38 GHz 2H
GB 9790
ODU ALFOplus 42
1500
42 GHz 1L
GB 9791
ODU ALFOplus 42
1500
42 GHz 1H
GB 9792
ODU ALFOplus 42
1500
42 GHz 2L
GB 9793
ODU ALFOplus 42
1500
42 GHz 2H
GB 9794
ODU ALFOplus 42
1500
42 GHz 3L
GB 9795
ODU ALFOplus 42
1500
42 GHz 3H
13.4
ODU INSTALLATION KIT
The ALFOplus system installation kit is concerning pole mounting of ODU according with the operating frequency, dimensions and presence of the centring ring.
-
V32308
for ODU with frequency from 15 to 38 GHz
The following installation kit is supplied with the equipment.
1+0 version
60 to 129 mm pole mounting kit:
centring ring and relevant screws
pole support system plus antenna (already assembled) and pole fixing brackets
1+0 ODU support and relevant screws
ODU with O-ring and devices for ground connection.
Required tools for mounting (not supplied):
154
N.1 2.5 mm Allen wrench
N.1 3 mm Allen wrench
N.1 6 mm Allen wrench
N.1 13 mm spanner
N.2 17 mm spanner.
MN.00273.E - 004
Section 8.
ADDENDUM
14
INTRODUCTION
14.1
GENERALS
This document describes technical specifications (international standards, frequency range, bandwidth,
power, sensitivities, ....) for all available frequencies of ALFOPlus system.
MN.00273.E - 004
155
15
ALFOPLUS 11GHZ CHARACTERISTICS
15.1
FOREWORD
The equipment complies with the following international standards:
ITU-R F.387-10 and CEPT T/R 12-06 for RF channel arrangement
FCC CFR Title 47 Part 101
EN 300 019 Climatic Characteristics (Operation: Class 4.1 for ODU; storage: class 1.2; transport:
class 2.3)
EN 60950-22 for Safety
IEEE 802.3 for Ethernet interfaces
15.2
GENERAL
The reported values are guaranteed if not specifically defined otherwise.
15.2.1
-
Available frequencies
Frequency band
see Tab.32
Tab.32 - Frequency band
156
Frequency range
(MHz)
Duplex spacing
(MHz)
Reference
recommendation
10700 - 11700
530
CEPT T/R 12-06

ITU-R F.387-10
10700 - 11700
490
CEPT T/R 12-06

ITU-R F.387-10
10700 - 11705
500
Modulation scheme
4QAMs/4QAM/16QAMs/16QAM/32QAM/64QAM/
128QAM/256QAM/512QAM/1024QAM
Capacity
see Tab.33
MN.00273.E - 004
RF filter range
Wide Filter Option see Tab.34
Transceiver tuning range
see Tab.34
The frequency carrier limits are given in Tab.35 and Tab.36.

Tab.33 - Net Radio Throughput in Mbit/s versus channel bandwidth for ALFOplus equipment
Channel bandwidth (MHz)
Modulation
Type
10
14
28
30
40
56
4QAMs
9.295
11.408
16.393
32.956
35.117
46.462
65.912
4QAM
10.872
15.328
22.025
44.279
47.183
62.426
88.558
16QAMs
16.225
22.875
32.870
66.081
70.414
93.163
132.161
16QAM
21.080
29.720
42.705
85.854
91.484
121.040
171.708
32QAM
24.483
34.517
49.599
99.713
106.251
140.578
199.425
64QAM
30.293
42.707
61.368
123.373
131.463
173.936
246.746
128QAM
36.102
50.898
73.137
147.034
156.675
207.294
294.068
256QAM
41.912
59.088
84.906
170.694
181.887
240.651
341.389
512QAM
47.763
67.279
96.759
194.524
207.100
274.009
389.048
1024QAM
53.572
75.469
108.529
218.185
232.312
307.336
436.369
Tab.34 - Filter sub-bands for ALFOplus 11GHz

FREQUENCY RANGE: 10.7 11.7 MHz - GO-RETURN: 490 MHz
CEPT T/R 12-06 and ITU-R F.387-10 - f0=11200 MHz
Sub Band
Lower Half Limits [MHz]
Upper Half Limits [MHz]
10715 - 10895
11205 - 11385
10875 - 11055
11365 - 11545
11035 - 11215
11525 - 11705
RF Filter Tuning Range

[MHz]
180

CEPT T/R 12-06 and ITU-R F387-10 - f0=11200 MHz
Sub Band
10695 - 10875
11225 - 11405
10855 - 11035
11385 - 11565
11015 - 11195
11545 - 11725

[MHz]
180

Sub Band
10700 - 10730
11200 - 11230
11170 - 11200
11670 - 11700
MN.00273.E - 004

[MHz]
30
157
Tab.35 - 10700 MHz - 11700 MHz band - Go-return 490 MHz - Frequency carrier limits
FREQUENCY RANGE: 10700 11700 MHz - CEPT T/R 12-06 and ITU-R F.387-10- GO-RETURN: 490 MHz
- 180 MHz RF Filter Tuning Range
SUB BAND 1
Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]
Lower half of the band
Higher half of the band
Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
10718.5
10891.5
11208.5
11381.5
14
10722
10888
11212
11378
28
10729
10881
11219
11371
40
10735
10875
11225
11365
56
10743
10867
11233
11357
SUB BAND 2
Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]
Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
10878.5
11051.5
11368.5
11541.5
14
10882
11048
11372
11538
28
10889
11041
11379
11531
40
10895
11035
11385
11525
56
10903
11027
11393
11517
SUB BAND 3
158
Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]
Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
11038.5
11211.5
11528.5
11701.5
14
11042
11208
11532
11698
28
11049
11201
11539
11691
40
11055
11195
11545
11685
56
11063
11187
11553
11677
MN.00273.E - 004
Tab.36 - 10700 MHz - 11700 MHz band - Go-return 530 MHz - Frequency carrier limits
FREQUENCY RANGE: 10700 11700 MHz - CEPT T/R 12-06 and ITU-R F.387-10 - GO-RETURN: 530 MHz
- 180 MHz RF Filter Tuning Range
SUB BAND 1
Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]
Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
10698.5
10871.5
11228.5
11401.5
14
10702
10868
11232
11398
28
10709
10861
11239
11391
40
10715
10855
11245
11385
56
10723
10847
11253
11377
SUB BAND 2
Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]
Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
10858.5
11031.5
11388.5
11561.5
14
10862
11028
11392
11558
28
10869
11021
11399
11551
40
10875
11015
11405
11545
56
10883
11007
11413
11537
SUB BAND 3
Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]
Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
11018.5
11191.5
11548.5
11721.5
14
11022
11188
11552
11718
28
11029
11181
11559
11711
40
11035
11175
11565
11705
56
11043
11167
11573
11697
Tab.37 - 10700 MHz - 11700 MHz band - FCC CFR Title 47 Part 101 - Go-Return 490 MHz - Frequency carrier limits
FREQUENCY RANGE: 10700 11700 MHz - FCC CFR Title 47 Part 101
Go-Return: 490 MHz - 180 MHz RF Filter Tuning Range
SUB BAND 1
Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]
Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
10
10720
10890
11210
11380
30
10730
10880
11220
11370
MN.00273.E - 004
159
40
10740
10875
11225
11365
SUB BAND 2
Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]
Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
10
11880
11050
11370
11540
30
11890
11040
11380
11530
40
11895
11035
11385
11525
SUB BAND 3
Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]
Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
10
11040
11210
11530
11700
30
11050
11200
11540
11690
40
11055
11195
11545
11685
Tab.38 - 10700 MHz - 11700 MHz band - FCC CFR Title 47 Part 101 - Go-Return 500 MHz - Frequency carrier limits
FREQUENCY RANGE: 10700 11700 MHz - FCC CFR Title 47 Part 101
Go-Return: 500 MHz - 30 MHz RF filter tuning range
SUB BAND 1
Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]
Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
10
10705
10725
11205
11225
30
10715
10715
11215
11215
40
SUB BAND 2
Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]
160
Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
10
11175
11195
11675
11695
30
11185
11185
11685
11685
40
MN.00273.E - 004
15.2.2
-
Transmitter characteristics
Maximum transmit power
see Tab.39
Tab.39 - Maximum transmit power
MODULATION
Nominal Output Power

[dBm]
Guaranteed Output
Power [dBm]
4QAMs
27
25
4QAM
27
25
16QAMs
24
22
16QAM
24
22
32QAM
23
21
64QAM
23
21
128QAM
23
21
256QAM
23
21
512QAM
23
21
1024QAM
22
20
Nominal Power
Tolerance
2 dB
Transmit power with ACM
Mean Constant Mode: All the selected ACM

profiles transmit the same output power level,
that is equal to the Maximum transmit power
indicated in the table above for the highest
modulation level selected.
Hybrid Mode: the ACM profiles above the
reference modulation transmit in Peak Constant
Mode (i.e. each modulation transmits the output
power indicated in the table above). Below the
reference modulation the Mean Constant Mode is
followed.
Tx bandwidth
see Tab.34
Frequency agility
following ITU-R/CEPT channel plans or at 250 kHz

steps
Built-in transmit power attenuation range
20 dB
Attenuation Step
1 dB step
RTPC attenuation range
20 dB
Accuracy of built-in transmit power attenuation
2 dB
Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC) range
20 dB
ATPC Attenuation Step
1 dB
Spurious emissions
according to ETSI EN 301 390
RF frequency stability
5 ppm
10 ppm (including ageing)
Muting attenuation
60 dB
MN.00273.E - 004
161
15.2.3
Receiver characteristics
Receiver bandwidth
See Table 2
Noise Figure
6.5 dB
Equivalent Noise Bandwidth [MHz]
see Tab.40
Tab.40 - Equivalent Noise Bandwidth [MHz]
CHANNEL BANDWIDTH
[MHz]
ENBW [MHz]
6.1
10
8.6
14
12.2
28
24.4
30
26
40
34.4
56
48.8
Signal to Noise Ratio [dB]
see Tab.41
Tab.41 - Signal to Noise Ratio [dB]
CHANNEL BANDWIDTH [MHz]

7
10
14
28
30
40
56
4QAMs
4QAM
16QAMs
16QAM
32QAM
BER=10-6
7.5
13.5
15.5
18
BER=10-10
9.5
11
15.5
17.5
20
BER=10-6
7.5
13.5
15.5
18
BER=10-10
9.5
11
15.5
17.5
20
BER=10-6
6.5
13.5
15.5
18
BER=10-10
8.5
11
15.5
17.5
20
BER=10-6
6.5
13.5
16
18
BER=10-10
8.5
11
15.5
18
20
BER=10-6
6.5
13.5
16
18
BER=10-10
8.5
11
15.5
18
20
BER=10-6
6.5
13.5
16
18
BER=10-10
8.5
11
15.5
18
20
BER=10-6
6.5
13.5
15.5
18
BER=10-10
8.5
11
15.5
17.5
20

7
10
162
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
512QAM
1024QAM
BER=10-6
20.5
23.5
26.5
30
33.5
BER=10-10
22.5
25.5
28.5
32
35.5
BER=10-6
20.5
23.5
26.5
30
33.5
BER=10-10
22.5
25.5
28.5
32
35.5
MN.00273.E - 004
14
28
30
40
56
-
BER=10-6
20.5
23.5
26.5
30
33
BER=10-10
22.5
25.5
28.5
32
35
BER=10-6
20.5
23.5
26.5
30
33
BER=10-10
22.5
25.5
28.5
32
35
BER=10-6
20.5
23.5
26.5
30
33
BER=10-10
22.5
25.5
28.5
32
35
BER=10-6
20.5
23.5
26.5
30
33
BER=10-10
22.5
25.5
28.5
32
35
BER=10-6
20.5
23.5
26.5
30
33
BER=10-10
22.5
25.5
28.5
32
35
Guaranteed receiver sensitivities
[dBm]
see Tab.42
Tab.42

7
10
14
28
30
40
56
4QAMs
4QAM
16QAMs
16QAM
32QAM
BER=10-6
-93.0
-90.5
-87.0
-84.0
-82.0
BER=10-10
-91.0
-88.5
-85.0
-82.0
-80.0
BER=10-6
-92.0
-89.0
-85.5
-82.5
-80.5
BER=10-10
-90.0
-87.0
-83.5
-80.5
-78.5
BER=10-6
-92.0
-88.5
-85.5
-82.0
-80.0
BER=10-10
-90.0
-86.5
-83.5
-80.0
-78.0
BER=10-6
-89.0
-85.5
-82.0
-79.0
-77.5
BER=10-10
-87.0
-83.5
-80.0
-77.0
-75.5
BER=10-6
-88.5
-85.0
-81.5
-78.5
-77.0
BER=10-10
-86.5
-83.0
-79.5
-76.5
-75.0
BER=10-6
-87.5
-84.0
-80.5
-77.5
-75.5
BER=10-10
-85.5
-82.0
-78.5
-75.5
-73.5
BER=10-6
-86.0
-82.5
-79.0
-76.0
-74.0
BER=10-10
-84.0
-80.5
-77.0
-74.0
-72.0

7
10
14
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
512QAM
1024QAM
BER=10-6
-79.5
-76.0
-73.5
-70.5
-67.0
BER=10-10
-77.5
-74.0
-71.5
-68.5
-65.0
BER=10-6
-78.0
-74.5
-72.0
-69.0
-65.0
BER=10-10
-76.0
-72.5
-70.0
-67.0
-63.0
BER=10-6
-77.5
-74.0
-71.0
-68.0
-64.0
BER=10-10
-75.5
-72.0
-69.0
-66.0
-62.0
Typical receiver sensitivities are 2 dB lower
MN.00273.E - 004
163
28
30
40
56
BER=10-6
-74.5
-71.5
-68.0
-65.5
-61.5
BER=10-10
-72.5
-69.5
-66.0
-63.5
-59.5
BER=10-6
-74.0
-71.0
-67.5
-65.0
-61.0
BER=10-10
-72.0
-69.0
-65.5
-63.0
-59.0
BER=10-6
-73.0
-70.0
-66.5
-64.0
-59.5
BER=10-10
-71.0
-68.0
-64.5
-62.0
-57.5
BER=10-6
-71.5
-68.5
-65.0
-62.5
-58.0
BER=10-10
-69.5
-66.5
-63.0
-60.5
-56.0
Rx Spurious emissions
AGC dynamic range
from -22 dBm to Threshold @ BER=10-6
Accuracy of Rx level indication @ 25 C (PC reading)2dB in the range -22dBm Thresholds @

BER=10-6
Accuracy of Rx level indication over the

whole temperature range (PC reading)
3dB in the range -50dBm Thresholds @

BER=10-6
4dB in the range -49dBm -22dBm
Maximum input level for BER 10-6
-22 dBm
Residual BER (RBER)
10-12
Receiver Dynamic Range (4) [dB]
see Tab.43
Tab.43 - Receiver Dynamic Range [dB]

CHANNEL
BANDWIDTH
[MHz]
4QAMs
4QAM
16QAMs
16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
512QAM
1024QAM
58.0
55.5
52.0
49.0
47.0
44.5
41.0
38.5
35.5
32.0
10
57.0
54.0
50.5
47.5
45.5
43.0
39.5
37.0
34.0
30.0
14
57.0
53.5
50.5
47.0
45.0
42.5
39.0
36.0
33.0
29.0
28
54.0
50.5
47.0
44.0
42.5
39.5
36.5
33.0
30.5
26.5
30
53.5
50.0
46.5
43.5
42.0
39.0
36.0
32.5
30.0
26.0
40
52.5
49.0
45.5
42.5
40.5
38.0
35.0
31.5
29.0
24.5
56
51.0
47.5
44.0
41.0
39.0
36.5
33.5
30.0
27.5
23.0
15.2.4
-
164
Radio flange
Radio WG flange type
UBR 100
Range over which at least RBER performances are guaranteed (-25dBm Threshold @ 10-6 +10dB)
MN.00273.E - 004
15.2.5
Power supply and consumption
Operating voltage
48 Vdc 15%
Power consumption
see Tab.44
Tab.44 - Power consumption
15.2.6
-
Typical Power
Consumption (W)
Guaranteed Power
Consumption (W)
35
37
Mechanical characteristics
Physical size of system components
see Tab.45
Tab.45 - Physical size of system components
Width (mm)
Height (mm)
Depth (mm)
270.4
287.3
154.6
Weight of system components
MN.00273.E - 004
4.3 kg
165
16
16.1
FOREWORD
ITU-R F497 and CEPT Recommendation ERC/REC 12-02 for RF channel arrangement
EN 300 132-2 Characteristics of power supply
EN 300 019 Climatic Characteristics (Operation: class 4.1 for ODU; storage: class 1.2; transport:
class 2.3).
16.2
GENERAL
16.2.1
-
Frequency band
see Tab.46
Reference
Recommendation
Frequency Range [GHz] Duplex Spacing [MHz]

12.75 13.25
266
ITU-R F497 CEPT T/R 12-02
Modulation scheme
Capacity
see Tab.47
RF filter range
Wide Filter Option (see Tab.48)
see Tab.48
The frequency carrier limits are given in Tab.49.
166
MN.00273.E - 004
Tab.47 - Net Radio Throughput in Mbit/s versus Channel Bandwidth for ALFOplus equipment
Modulation type
Channel bandwidth [MHz]

7
14
28
56
4QAMs
9.295
16.393
32.956
65.912
4QAM
10.872
22.025
44.279
88.558
16QAMs
16.225
32.870
66.081
132.161
16QAM
21.080
42.705
85.854
171.708
32QAM
24.483
49.599
99.713
199.425
64QAM
30.293
61.368
123.373
246.746
128QAM
36.102
73.137
147.034
294.068
256QAM
41.912
84.906
170.694
341.389
512QAM
47.763
96.759
194.524
389.048
1024QAM
53.572
108.529
218.185
436.369
Tab.48 - RF filter sub-bands for ALFOplus 13GHz

FREQUENCY RANGE: 12.75 13.25 GHz - GO-RETURN: 266 MHzITU-R F.497 - CEPT ERC/REC 12-02 E f0=12996 MHz
Sub Band
12751 12835
13017 13101
12835 12919
13101 13185
12891 12975
13157 13241
12779 12863
13045 13129
MN.00273.E - 004

[MHz]
84
167
Tab.49 - 12.75 13.25 GHz band - Go-Return 266 MHz - Frequency carrier limits
FREQUENCY RANGE: 12.75 13.25 GHz - GO-RETURN: 266 MHz -84 MHz RF Filter Tuning Range
SUB BAND 1
Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
12754.5
12831.5
13020.5
13097.5
14
12758
12828
13024
13094
28
12765
12821
13031
13087
56
12779
12807
13045
13073
SUB BAND 2
Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
12838.5
12915.5
13104.5
13181.5
14
12842
12912
13108
13178
28
12849
12905
13115
13171
56
12863
12891
13129
13157
SUB BAND 3
Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
12894.5
12971.5
13160.5
13237.5
14
12898
12968
13164
13234
28
12905
12961
13171
13227
56
12919
12947
13185
13213
SUB BAND 4
168
Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
12782.5
12866.5
13048.5
13132.5
14
12786
12870
13052
13136
28
12793
12877
13059
13143
56
12807
12891
13073
13157
MN.00273.E - 004
16.2.2
-
see Tab.50
MODULATION

[dBm]
Guaranteed Output
Power [dBm]
4QAMs
27
25
4QAM
27
25
16QAMs
24
22
16QAM
24
22
32QAM
23
21
64QAM
23
21
128QAM
23
21
256QAM
23
21
512QAM
23
21
1024QAM
22
20
Nominal Power Tolerance
2 dB

followed.
Tx bandwidth
see Tab.48
Frequency agility

steps
20 dB
Attenuation Step
1 dB step
20 dB
2 dB
20 dB
Spurious emissions
5 ppm
MN.00273.E - 004
1 dB
169
16.2.3
Receiver bandwidth
See Tab.48
Noise Figure
6.5 dB
see Tab.51
Tab.51 - Equivalent Noise Bandwidth
ENBW [MHz]
6.4
14
12.2
28
24.4
56
48.8
Signal to Noise Ratio [dB]
see Tab.52
Tab.52 - Signal to Noise Ratio [dB]

7
14
28
56
4QAMs
4QAM
16QAMs
16QAM
32QAM
BER=10-6
13.5
15.5
18
BER=10-10
11
15.5
17.5
20
BER=10-6
6.5
13.5
15.5
18
BER=10-10
8.5
11
15.5
17.5
20
BER=10-6
6.5
13.5
16
18
BER=10-10
8.5
11
15.5
18
20
BER=10-6
6.5
13.5
15.5
18
BER=10-10
8.5
11
15.5
17.5
20
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
512QAM
1024QAM
BER=10-6
20.5
23.5
26.5
30
33.5
BER=10-10
22.5
25.5
28.5
32
35.5
BER=10-6
20.5
23.5
26.5
30
33
BER=10-10
22.5
25.5
28.5
32
35
BER=10-6
20.5
23.5
26.5
30
33
BER=10-10
22.5
25.5
28.5
32
35
BER=10-6
20.5
23.5
26.5
30
33
BER=10-10
22.5
25.5
28.5
32
35

7
14
28
56
170
MN.00273.E - 004
Guaranteed receiver sensitivities
[dBm]
see Tab.53
Tab.53 - Guaranteed receiver sensitivities [dBm]

7
14
28
56
64QAM
7
14
28
56
4QAMs
4QAM
16QAMs
16QAM
32QAM
BER=10-6
-93.0
-90.5
-87.0
-84.0
-82.0
BER=10-10
-91.0
-88.5
-85.0
-82.0
-80.0
BER=10-6
-92.0
-88.5
-85.5
-82.0
-80.0
BER=10-10
-90.0
-86.5
-83.5
-80.0
-78.0
BER=10-6
-89.0
-85.5
-82.0
-79.0
-77.5
BER=10-10
-87.0
-83.5
-80.0
-77.0
-75.5
BER=10-6
-86.0
-82.5
-79.0
-76.0
-74.0
BER=10-10
-84.0
-80.5
-77.0
-74.0
-72.0
128QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
512QAM
1024QAM
BER=10-6
-79.5
-76.0
-73.5
-70.5
-67.0
BER=10-10
-77.5
-74.0
-71.5
-68.5
-65.0
BER=10-6
-77.5
-74.0
-71.0
-68.0
-64.0
BER=10-10
-75.5
-72.0
-69.0
-66.0
-62.0
BER=10-6
-74.5
-71.5
-68.0
-65.5
-61.5
BER=10-10
-72.5
-69.5
-66.0
-63.5
-59.5
BER=10-6
-71.5
-68.5
-65.0
-62.5
-58.0
BER=10-10
-69.5
-66.5
-63.0
-60.5
-56.0
AGC dynamic range

BER=10-6


BER=10-6
-6
Maximum input level for BER 10
-22 dBm
Residual BER (RBER)
10-12
Receiver Dynamic Range6 [dB]
see Tab.54
Typical receiver sensitivities are 2 dB lower
Range over which at least RBER performances are guaranteed (-25 dBm Threshold @10-6 + 10 dB)
MN.00273.E - 004
171
Tab.54 - Receiver Dynamic Range

CHANNEL
BANDWIDTH
[MHz]
4QAMs
4QAM
58.0
55.5
52.0
49.0
47.0
44.5
41.0
38.5
35.5
32.0
14
57.0
53.5
50.5
47.0
45.0
42.5
39.0
36.0
33.0
29.0
28
54.0
50.5
47.0
44.0
42.5
39.5
36.5
33.0
30.5
26.5
56
51.0
47.5
44.0
41.0
39.0
36.5
33.5
30.0
27.5
23.0
16.2.4
-
16QAM
128QA 256QA 512QA 1024QA
16QAM 32QAM 64QAM
s
M
M
M
M
Radio flange
16.2.5
UBR 120
48 Vdc 15%
Power consumption
see Tab.55
16.2.6
-
Typical Power
Consumption [W]
Guaranteed Power
Consumption [W]
37
39
see Tab.56
172
Width [mm]
Height [mm]
Depth [mm]
270.4
287.3
154.6
4.3 Kg
MN.00273.E - 004
17
17.1
FOREWORD
ITU-R F.636 and CEPT Recommendation T/R 12-07 for RF channel arrangement
class 2.3)
17.2
GENERAL
17.2.1
-
Frequency band
see Tab.57
MN.00273.E - 004
Frequency range
(MHz)
Duplex spacing
(MHz)
Reference
recommendation
14501 - 15348
420
ITU-R F.636
14403 - 15348
490
ITU-R F.636
14501 - 15348
728
CEPT T/R 12-07
14613 - 15251
322
N.A.
14620 - 15244
315
N.A:
173
Modulation scheme
Capacity
see Tab.57
RF filter range
Transceiver tuning range:
see Tab.58
Frequency carrier limits are given in Tab.59, Tab.60, Tab.61, Tab.62, Tab.63 and Tab.64.
Tab.58 - Net Radio throughput in Mbit/s versus Channel Bandwidth for ALFOplus equipment
174
Channel bandwidth (MHz)
Modulation
Type
14
28
56
4QAMs
9.295
16.393
32.956
65.912
4QAM
10.872
22.025
44.279
88.558
16QAMs
16.225
32.870
66.081
132.161
16QAM
21.080
42.705
85.854
171.708
32QAM
24.483
49.599
99.713
199.425
64QAM
30.293
61.368
123.373
246.746
128QAM
36.102
73.137
147.034
294.068
256QAM
41.912
84.906
170.694
341.389
512QAM
47.763
96.759
194.524
389.048
1024QAM
53.572
108.529
218.185
436.369
MN.00273.E - 004
Tab.59 - RF filter sub-bands for ALFOplus 15 GHz

FREQUENCY RANGE:14501 15348 MHz - GO-RETURN: 420 MHzITU-R F636 - f0=11701MHz
Sub Band
14500 - 14620
14920 - 15040
14612 - 14732
15032 - 15152
14724 - 14844
15144 - 15264
14808 - 14928
15228 - 15348

[MHz]
120
FREQUENCY RANGE: 14403 15348 MHz - GO-RETURN: 490 MHzITU-R F636 - f0=11701MHz
Sub Band
14402 - 14522
14892 - 15012
14514 - 14634
15004 - 15124
14626 - 14746
15116 - 15236
14738 - 14858
15228 - 15348

[MHz]
120
FREQUENCY RANGE: 14501 15348 MHz - GO-RETURN: 728 MHzCEPT T/R 12-07 - f0=14924MHz
Sub Band

[MHz]
14500 - 14620
15228 - 15348
120
FREQUENCY RANGE: 14600 15240 MHz - GO-RETURN: 322 MHz

Sub Band
14613 - 14705
14935 - 15027
14669 - 14761
14991 - 15083
14725 - 14817
15047 - 15139
14781 - 14873
15103 - 15195
14837 - 14929
15159 - 15251

[MHz]
92

Sub Band
14620 - 14705
14935 - 15020
14676 - 14761
14991 - 15076
14732 - 14817
15047 - 15132
14788 - 14873
15103 - 15188
14844 - 14929
15159 - 15244
MN.00273.E - 004

[MHz]
85
175
Tab.60 - 14501 - 14348 MHz band - Go-Return 420 MHz - Frequency carrier limits
FREQUENCY RANGE: 14501 15348 MHz - GO-RETURN: 420 MHz - 120 MHz RF Filter Tuning Range
SUB BAND 1
Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]
Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
14503.5
14616.5
14923.5
15036.5
14
14507
14613
14927
15033
28
14514
14606
14934
15026
56
14528
14592
14948
15012
SUB BAND 2
Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]
Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
14615.5
14728.5
15035.5
15148.5
14
14619
14725
15039
15145
28
14626
14718
15046
15138
56
14640
14704
15060
15124
SUB BAND 3
Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]
Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
14727.5
14840.5
15147.5
15260.5
14
14731
14837
15151
15257
28
14738
14830
15158
15250
56
14752
14816
15172
15236
SUB BAND 4
176
Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]
Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
14811.5
14931.5
15231.5
15351.5
14
14815
14935
15235
15355
28
14822
14942
15242
15362
56
14836
14956
15256
15376
MN.00273.E - 004
Tab.61 - 1403 - 15348 MHz band - Go-return 490 MHz - Frequency carrier limits
SUB BAND 1
Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]
Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
14405.5
14518.5
14895.5
15008.5
14
14409
14515
14899
15005
28
14416
14508
14906
14998
56
14430
14494
14920
14984
SUB BAND 2
Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]
Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
14517.5
14630.5
15007.5
15120.5
14
14521
14627
15011
15117
28
14528
14620
15018
15110
56
14542
14606
15032
15096
SUB BAND 3
Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]
Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
14629.5
14742.5
15119.5
15232.5
14
14633
14739
15123
15229
28
14640
14732
15130
15222
56
14654
14718
15144
15208
SUB BAND 4
Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]
Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
14741.5
14861.5
15231.5
15351.5
14
14745
14865
15235
15355
28
14752
14872
15242
15362
56
14766
14886
15256
15376
MN.00273.E - 004
177
SUB BAND 1
Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]
178
Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
14503.5
14616.5
15231.5
15344.5
14
14507
14613
15235
15341
28
14514
14606
15242
15334
56
14528
14592
15256
15320
MN.00273.E - 004
SUB BAND 1
Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]
Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
14616.5
14701.5
14938.5
15023.5
14
14620
14698
14942
15020
28
14627
14691
14949
15013
56
14641
14677
14963
14999
SUB BAND 2
Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]
Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
14672.5
14757.5
14994.5
15079.5
14
14676
14754
14998
15076
28
14683
14747
15005
15069
56
14697
14733
15019
15055
SUB BAND 3
Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]
Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
14728.5
14813.5
15050.5
15135.5
14
14732
14810
15054
15132
28
14739
14803
15061
15125
56
14753
14789
15075
15111
SUB BAND 4
Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]
Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
14784.5
14869.5
15106.5
15191.5
14
14788
14866
15110
15188
28
14795
14859
15117
15181
56
14809
14845
15131
15167
SUB BAND 5
Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]
Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
14840.5
14925.5
15162.5
15247.5
14
14844
14922
15166
15244
28
14851
14915
15173
15237
56
14865
14901
15187
15223
MN.00273.E - 004
179
SUB BAND 1
Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]
Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
14623.5
14701.5
14938.5
15016.5
14
14627
14698
14942
15013
28
14634
14691
14949
15006
56
14648
14677
14963
14992
SUB BAND 2
Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]
Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
14679.5
14757.5
14994.5
15072.5
14
14683
14754
14998
15069
28
14690
14747
15005
15062
56
14704
14733
15019
15048
SUB BAND 3
Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]
Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
14735.5
14813.5
15050.5
15128.5
14
14739
14810
15054
15125
28
14746
14803
15061
15118
56
14760
14789
15075
15104
SUB BAND 4
Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]
Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
14791.5
14869.5
15106.5
15184.5
14
14795
14866
15110
15181
28
14802
14859
15117
15174
56
14816
14845
15131
15160
SUB BAND 5
180
Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]
Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
14847.5
14925.5
15162.5
15240.5
14
14851
14922
15166
15237
28
14858
14915
15173
15230
56
14872
14901
15187
15216
MN.00273.E - 004
17.2.2
-
see Tab.65
Tab.65 -Maximum transmit power
MODULATION

[dBm]
Guaranteed Output Power

[dBm]
4QAMs
27
25
4QAM
27
25
16QAMs
24
22
16QAM
24
22
32QAM
23
21
64QAM
23
21
128QAM
23
21
256QAM
23
21
512QAM
23
21
1024QAM
22
20
Nominal Power
Tolerance
2 dB

reference modulation the Mean Constant Mode
is followed.
Tx bandwidth
see Tab.58
Frequency agility
Following ITU-R/CEPT channel plans or at 250 kHz

steps
20 dB
Attenuation Step
1 dB step
20 dB
2 dB
20 dB
Spurious emissions
5 ppm
Muting attenuation
60 db
MN.00273.E - 004
1 dB
181
17.2.3
Receiver bandwidth
see Tab.58
Noise Figure
6.5 dB
see Tab.66
CHANNEL BANDWIDTH
[MHz]
ENBW [MHz]
6.4
14
12.2
28
24.4
56
48.8
Signal to Noise Ratio (dB)
see Tab.67
Tab.67 - Signal to Noise Ratio (dB)

7
14
28
56
4QAMs
4QAM
16QAMs
16QAM
32QAM
BER=10-6
13.5
15.5
18
BER=10-10
11
15.5
17.5
20
BER=10-6
6.5
13.5
15.5
18
BER=10-10
8.5
11
15.5
17.5
20
BER=10-6
6.5
13.5
16
18
BER=10-10
8.5
11
15.5
18
20
BER=10-6
6.5
13.5
15.5
18
BER=10-10
8.5
11
15.5
17.5
20
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
512QAM
1024QAM
BER=10-6
20.5
23.5
26.5
30
33.5
BER=10-10
22.5
25.5
28.5
32
35.5
BER=10-6
20.5
23.5
26.5
30
33
BER=10-10
22.5
25.5
28.5
32
35
BER=10-6
20.5
23.5
26.5
30
33
BER=10-10
22.5
25.5
28.5
32
35
BER=10-6
20.5
23.5
26.5
30
33
BER=10-10
22.5
25.5
28.5
32
35

7
14
28
56
182
Guaranteed receiver sensitivities [dBm]
see Tab.68
Typical receiver sensitivities is 2dB lower
MN.00273.E - 004

7
14
28
56
4QAMs
4QAM
16QAMs
16QAM
32QAM
BER=10-6
-93.0
-90.5
-87.0
-84.0
-82.0
BER=10-10
-91.0
-88.5
-85.0
-82.0
-80.0
BER=10-6
-92.0
-88.5
-85.5
-82.0
-80.0
BER=10-10
-90.0
-86.5
-83.5
-80.0
-78.0
BER=10-6
-89.0
-85.5
-82.0
-79.0
-77.5
BER=10-10
-87.0
-83.5
-80.0
-77.0
-75.5
BER=10-6
-86.0
-82.5
-79.0
-76.0
-74.0
BER=10-10
-84.0
-80.5
-77.0
-74.0
-72.0
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
512QAM
1024QAM
BER=10-6
-79.5
-76.0
-73.5
-70.5
-67.0
BER=10-10
-77.5
-74.0
-71.5
-68.5
-65.0
BER=10-6
-77.5
-74.0
-71.0
-68.0
-64.0
BER=10-10
-75.5
-72.0
-69.0
-66.0
-62.0
BER=10-6
-74.5
-71.5
-68.0
-65.5
-61.5
BER=10-10
-72.5
-69.5
-66.0
-63.5
-59.5
BER=10-6
-71.5
-68.5
-65.0
-62.5
-58.0
BER=10-10
-69.5
-66.5
-63.0
-60.5
-56.0

7
14
28
56
According to ETSI EN 301 390
AGC dynamic range
From -22 dBm to Threshold @ BER=10-6

BER=10-6
Accuracy of Rx level indication over the whole

temperature range (PC reading)

BER=10-6
-22 dBm
Residual BER (RBER)
10-12
Receiver Dynamic Range (8) (dB)
see Tab.69
Range over which at least RBER performances are guaranteed (-25dBm threshold @10-6 +10dB)
MN.00273.E - 004
183
Tab.69 - Receiver Dynamic Range

CHANNEL
BANDWIDTH
[MHz]
4QAMs
4QAM
16QAMs
16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
512QAM
1024QAM
58.0
55.5
52.0
49.0
47.0
44.5
41.0
38.5
35.5
32.0
14
57.0
53.5
50.5
47.0
45.0
42.5
39.0
36.0
33.0
29.0
28
54.0
50.5
47.0
44.0
42.5
39.5
36.5
33.0
30.5
26.5
56
51.0
47.5
44.0
41.0
39.0
36.5
33.5
30.0
27.5
23.0
17.2.4
-
Radio flange
17.2.5
CBR 140
48 Vdc 15%
Power consumption
see Tab.70
Tab.70
17.2.6
-
Power consumption
Typical Power
Consumption (W)
Guaranteed Power
Consumption (W)
37
39
see Tab.71
184
Width (mm)
Height (mm)
Depth (mm)
270.4
287.3
154.6
4.3 kg
MN.00273.E - 004
18
ALFOPLUS 17 GHZ CHARACTERISTICS
18.1
FOREWORD
CEPT ERC REC 70-03
EN 302 217 for point to point fixed radio
class 2.3)
18.2
GENERAL
18.2.1
-
Frequency band
see Tab.83
FREQUENCY RANGE [MHz]
DUPLEX SPACING
[MHz]
REFERENCE
RECOMMENDATION
17100 17300
95 193
BEPT ERC REC 70-03
Modulation scheme
Capacity
see Tab.84
RF filter range
see Tab.85
MN.00273.E - 004
185
MODULATION TYPE

7
14
28
56
4QAMs
9.295
16.393
32.956
65.912
4QAM
10.872
22.025
44.279
88.558
16QAMs
16.225
32.870
66.081
132.161
16QAM
21.080
42.705
85.854
171.708
32QAM
24.483
49.599
99.713
199.425
64QAM
30.293
61.368
123.373
246.746
128QAM
36.102
73.137
147.034
294.068
256QAM
41.912
84.906
170.694
341.389
512QAM
47.763
96.759
194.524
389.048
1024QAM
53.572
108.529
218.185
436.369

FREQUENCY RANGE: 17100 17300 MHz - GO-RETURN: 95 193 MHz
Sub Band
RF Filter Range [MHz]
17100 17156
17244 17300
56
Tab.75 - 17100 MHz 17300 MHz band - Go-return 144 MHz - Frequency carrier limits
FREQUENCY RANGE: 17100 17300 MHz - GO-RETURN: 95 193 MHz 56 MHz RF Filter Tuning Range
SUB BAND 1
Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]
186
Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
17103.5
17152.5
17247.5
17296.5
14
17107
17149
17251
17293
28
17114
17142
17258
17286
56
17128
17128
17272
17272
MN.00273.E - 004
18.2.2
-
Maximum transmit power9
see Tab.89
MODULATION

[dBm]

[dBm]
4QAMs
22
20
4QAM
22
20
16QAMs
20
18
16QAM
20
18
32QAM
18
16
64QAM
18
16
128QAM
18
16
256QAM
18
16
512QAM
18
16
1024QAM
17
15
Nominal Power
Tolerance
2 dB

followed.
Tx bandwidth
see Tab.85
Frequency agility

steps
20 dB
Attenuation Step
1 dB step
20 dB
2 dB
20 dB
Spurious emissions
5 ppm
Muting attenuation:
60 dB
1 dB
The maximum e.i.r.p. stated in CEPT ERC REC 70 Rec. should be 100mW
MN.00273.E - 004
187
18.2.3
Receiver bandwidth
see Tab.85
Noise Figure
8 dB
see Tab.90
CHANNEL BANDWIDTH
[MHz]
ENBW [MHz]
6.4
14
12.2
28
24.4
56
48.8
see Tab.91

7
14
28
56
4QAMs
4QAM
16QAMs
16QAM
32QAM
BER=10-6
7.5
13.5
15.5
18
BER=10-10
9.5
11
15.5
17.5
20
BER=10-6
6.5
13.5
15.5
18
BER=10-10
8.5
11
15.5
17.5
20
BER=10-6
6.5
13.5
16
18
BER=10-10
8.5
11
15.5
18
20
BER=10-6
6.5
13.5
15.5
18
BER=10-10
8.5
11
15.5
17.5
20
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
512QAM
1024QAM
BER=10-6
20.5
23.5
26.5
30
33.5
BER=10-10
22.5
25.5
28.5
32
35.5
BER=10-6
20.5
23.5
26.5
30
33
BER=10-10
22.5
25.5
28.5
32
35
BER=10-6
20.5
23.5
26.5
30
33
BER=10-10
22.5
25.5
28.5
32
35
BER=10-6
20.5
23.5
26.5
30
33
BER=10-10
22.5
25.5
28.5
32
35

7
14
28
56
Guaranteed receiver sensitivities10 [dBm]
see Tab.92
10 Typical receiver sensitivities are 2dB lower.
188
MN.00273.E - 004

7
14
28
56
4QAMs
4QAM
16QAMs
16QAM
32QAM
BER=10-6
-91.5
-89.0
-85.5
-82.5
-80.5
BER=10-10
-89.5
-87.0
-83.5
-80.5
-78.5
BER=10-6
-90.5
-87.0
-83.5
-80.5
-78.5
BER=10-10
-88.5
-85.0
-81.5
-78.5
-76.5
BER=10-6
-87.5
-84.0
-80.5
-77.5
-76.0
BER=10-10
-85.5
-82.0
-78.5
-75.5
-74.0
BER=10-6
-84.5
-81.0
-77.5
-74.5
-72.5
BER=10-10
-82.5
-79.0
-75.5
-72.5
-70.5
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
512QAM
1024QAM
BER=10-6
-78.0
-74.5
-72.0
-69.0
-65.5
BER=10-10
-76.0
-72.5
-70.0
-67.0
-63.5
BER=10-6
-76.0
-72.5
-69.5
-66.5
-62.5
BER=10-10
-74.0
-70.5
-67.5
-64.5
-60.5
BER=10-6
-73.0
-70.0
-66.5
-64.0
-60.0
BER=10-10
-71.0
-68.0
-64.5
-62.0
-58.0
BER=10-6
-70.0
-67.0
-63.5
-61.0
-56.5
BER=10-10
-68.0
-65.0
-61.5
-59.0
-54.5

7
14
28
56
AGC dynamic range

BER=10-6


BER=10-6
-22 dBm
Residual BER (RBER)
10-12
Receiver Dynamic Range
11
(dB)
see Tab.93
Tab.80 - Receiver Dynamic Range (dB)

CHANNEL
BANDWIDTH
[MHz]
4QAMs
4QAM
16QAMs
16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
512QAM
1024QAM
56.5
54.0
50.5
47.5
45.5
43.0
39.0
37.0
34.0
30.5
14
55.5
52.0
48.5
45.5
43.5
41.0
37.5
34.5
31.5
27.5
28
52.5
49.0
45.5
42.5
41.0
38.0
35.0
31.5
29.0
25.0
56
49.5
46.0
42.5
39.5
37.5
35.0
32.0
28.5
26.0
21.5
11 Range over which at least RBER performances are guaranteed (-25 dBm threshold @ 10-6 +10dB)
MN.00273.E - 004
189
18.2.4
-
Radio flange
18.2.5
UBR 220
48 Vdc 15%
Power consumption
see Tab.94
18.2.6
-
Typical Power
Consumption (W)
Guaranteed Power
Consumption (W)
37
39
see Tab.95
190
Width (mm)
Height (mm)
Depth (mm)
270.4
287.3
154.6
4.3 kg
MN.00273.E - 004
19
19.1
FOREWORD
ITU-R F.595 and CEPT Rec. T/R 12-03 for RF channel arrangement
EN 302 217 for point to point fixed radio
class 2.3)
19.2
GENERAL
19.2.1
-
Frequency band
see Tab.83
FREQUENCY RANGE [MHz]
DUPLEX SPACING
[MHz]
REFERENCE
RECOMMENDATION
17700 19700
1010
ITU-R F.595 - CEPT T/R 12-03
17700 19700
1560
ITU-R F.595 - Annex 7
17700 19700
1560
Modulation scheme
Capacity
see Tab.84
RF filter range
see Tab.85
MN.00273.E - 004
191

MODULATION TYPE

7
10
14
20
28
30
40
50
56
4QAMs
9.295
11.408
16.393
23.231
32.956
32.117
46.462
58.078
65.912
4QAM
10.872
15.328
22.025
31.213
44.279
47.183
62.426
78.033
88.558
16QAMs
16.225
22.875
32.870
46.581
66.081
70.414
93.163
116.454
132.161
16QAM
21.080
29.720
42.705
60.520
85.854
91.484
121.040
151.300
171.708
32QAM
24.483
34.517
49.599
70.289
99.713
106.251
140.578
175.723
199.425
64QAM
30.293
42.707
61.368
86.968
123.373
131.373
173.936
217.420
246.746
128QAM
36.102
50.898
73.137
103.647
147.034
156.675
207.294
259.117
294.068
256QAM
41.912
59.088
84.906
120.326
170.694
181.887
240.651
300.814
341.389
512QAM
47.763
67.279
96.759
137.004
194.524
207.100
274.009
342.511
389.048
1024QAM
53.572
75.469
108.529
153.683
218.185
232.312
307.336
384.208
436.369

ITU-R F.595 - CEPT REC T/R 12-03 - f0=18700 MHz
Sub Band
17699 18058
18709 19068
359
18016 18375
19026 19385
359
18332 18691
19342 19701
359
FREQUENCY RANGE: 17700 18140 MHz paired with 19260 19700 MHz GO-RETURN: 1560 MHz - ITU-R F.595 - Annex 7
192
Sub Band
17700 18140
19260 19700
440
MN.00273.E - 004
Tab.86 - 17700 MHz 19700 MHz band - Go-return 1010 - Frequency carrier limits
FREQUENCY RANGE: 17700 19700 MHz - ITU-R F.595 - Annex7- GO-RETURN: 1010 MHz - 359 MHz
SUB BAND 1
Channel
bandwidth
[MHz] a
Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
17702.5
18054.5
18712.5
19064.5
14
17706
18051
18716
19061
28
17712.75
18044.25
18722.75
19054.25
56
17726.5
18030.5
18736.5
19040.5
SUB BAND 2
Channel
bandwidth
[MHz] a.
Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
18019.5
18371.5
19029.5
19381.5
14
18023
18368
19033
19378
28
18029.75
18361.25
19039.75
19371.25
56
18043.5
18347.5
19053.5
19357.5
SUB BAND 3
Channel
bandwidth
[MHz] a.
Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
18335.5
18687.5
19345.5
19697.5
14
18339
18684
19349
19694
28
18345.75
18677.25
19355.75
19687.25
56
18359.5
18663.5
19369.5
19673.5
a. The actual channel bandwidth is compliant with a channel spacing of 7, 13.75, 27.5 and 55 MHz respectively
MN.00273.E - 004
193
Tab.87 - 17700 MHz 18140 MHz paired with 19260 MHz - 19700 MHz band go-return 1560
MHz - Frequency carrier limits
FREQUENCY RANGE: 17700 18140 MHz paired with 19260 19700 MHz ITU-R F.595 - Annex 7 - GO-RETURN: 1560 MHz - 440 MHz RF Filter Tuning Range
SUB BAND 1
Channel
bandwidth
[MHz] a.
Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
17703.5
18136.5
19263.5
19696.5
14
17707
18133
19267
19693
28
17713.75
18126.25
19273.75
19686.25
56
17727.5
18112.5
19287.5
19672.5
Tab.88 - 17700 MHz 18140 MHz paired with 19260 MHz 17700 MHz 19700 MHz band - FCC
CFR Title 47 Part 101 - Go-Return 1560 MHz - Frequency carrier limits
FREQUENCY RANGE: 17700 19700 MHz FCC CFR Title 47 Part 101
GO-RETURN: 1560 MHz - 440 MHz RF Filter Tuning Range
SUB BAND 1
194
Channel
bandwidth
[MHz] a.
Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
10
17705
18135
19265
19695
20
17710
18130
19270
19690
30
17715
18125
19275
19685
40
17720
18120
19280
19680
50
17725
18115
19295
19675
MN.00273.E - 004
19.2.2
-
see Tab.89
MODULATION

[dBm]

[dBm]
4QAMs
23
21
4QAM
23
21
16QAMs
21
19
16QAM
21
19
32QAM
19
17
64QAM
19
17
128QAM
19
17
256QAM
19
17
512QAM
19
17
1024QAM
18
16
Nominal Power
Tolerance
2 dB

followed.
Tx bandwidth
see Tab.85
Frequency agility

steps
20 dB
Attenuation Step
1 dB step
20 dB
2 dB
20 dB
Spurious emissions
5 ppm
Muting attenuation:
60 dB
19.2.3
-
Receiver bandwidth
MN.00273.E - 004
1 dB
see Tab.85
195
Noise Figure
7 dB
see Tab.90
CHANNEL BANDWIDTH
[MHz]
ENBW [MHz]
6.1
10
8.6
14
12.2
20
17.2
28
24.4
30
26
40
34.4
50
43
56
48.8
see Tab.91

7
10
14
20
28
30
40
50
56
196
4QAMs
4QAM
16QAMs
16QAM
32QAM
BER=10-6
7.5
13.5
15.5
18
BER=10-10
9.5
11
15.5
17.5
20
BER=10-6
7.5
13.5
15.5
18
BER=10-10
9.5
11
15.5
17.5
20
BER=10-6
6.5
13.5
15.5
18
BER=10-10
8.5
11
15.5
17.5
20
BER=10-6
6.5
13.5
16
18
BER=10-10
8.5
11
15.5
18
20
BER=10-6
6.5
13.5
16
18
BER=10-10
8.5
11
15.5
18
20
BER=10-6
6.5
13.5
16
18
BER=10-10
8.5
11
15.5
18
20
BER=10-6
6.5
13.5
16
18
BER=10-10
8.5
11
15.5
18
20
BER=10-6
6.5
13.5
16
18
BER=10-10
8.5
11
15.5
18
20
BER=10-6
6.5
13.5
15.5
18
BER=10-10
8.5
11
15.5
17.5
20
MN.00273.E - 004

7
10
14
20
28
30
40
50
56
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
512QAM
1024QAM
BER=10-6
20.5
23.5
26.5
30
33.5
BER=10-10
22.5
25.5
28.5
32
35.5
BER=10-6
20.5
23.5
26.5
30
33.5
BER=10-10
22.5
25.5
28.5
32
35.5
BER=10-6
20.5
23.5
26.5
30
33
BER=10-10
22.5
25.5
28.5
32
35
BER=10-6
20.5
23.5
26.5
30
33
BER=10-10
22.5
25.5
28.5
32
35
BER=10-6
20.5
23.5
26.5
30
33
BER=10-10
22.5
25.5
28.5
32
35
BER=10-6
20.5
23.5
26.5
30
33
BER=10-10
22.5
25.5
28.5
32
35
BER=10-6
20.5
23.5
26.5
30
33
BER=10-10
22.5
25.5
28.5
32
35
BER=10-6
20.5
23.5
26.5
30
33
BER=10-10
22.5
25.5
28.5
32
35
BER=10-6
20.5
23.5
26.5
30
33
BER=10-10
22.5
25.5
28.5
32
35
see Tab.92

7
10
14
20
28
30
4QAMs
4QAM
16QAMs
16QAM
32QAM
BER=10-6
-92.5
-90.0
-86.5
-83.5
-81.5
BER=10-10
-90.5
-88.0
-84.5
-81.5
-79.5
BER=10-6
-91.5
-88.5
-85.0
-82.0
-80.0
BER=10-10
-89.5
-86.5
-83.0
-80.0
-78.0
BER=10-6
-91.5
-88.0
-85.0
-81.5
-79.5
BER=10-10
-89.5
-86.0
-83.0
-79.5
-77.5
BER=10-6
-90.0
-86.5
-83.0
-80.0
-78.0
BER=10-10
-88.0
-84.5
-81.0
-78.0
-76.0
BER=10-6
-88.5
-85.0
-81.5
-78.5
-77.0
BER=10-10
-86.5
-83.0
-79.5
-76.5
-75.0
BER=10-6
-88.0
-84.5
-81.0
-78.0
-76.5
BER=10-10
-86.0
-82.5
-79.0
-76.0
-74.5
12 Typical receiver sensitivities are 2dB lower.
MN.00273.E - 004
197
40
50
56
BER=10-6
-87.0
-83.5
-80.0
-77.0
-75.0
BER=10-10
-85.0
-81.5
-78.0
-75.0
-73.0
BER=10-6
-86.0
-82.5
-79.0
-76.0
-74.0
BER=10-10
-84.0
-80.5
-77.0
-74.0
-72.0
BER=10-6
-85.5
-82.0
-78.5
-75.5
-73.5
BER=10-10
-83.5
-80.0
-76.5
-73.5
-71.5
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
512QAM
1024QAM
BER=10-6
-79.0
-75.5
-73.0
-70.0
-66.5
BER=10-10
-77.0
-73.5
-71.0
-68.0
-64.5
BER=10-6
-77.5
-74.0
-71.5
-68.5
-64.5
BER=10-10
-75.5
-72.0
-69.5
-66.5
-62.5
BER=10-6
-77.0
-73.5
-70.5
-67.5
-63.5
BER=10-10
-75.0
-71.5
-68.5
-65.5
-61.5
BER=10-6
-75.5
-72.0
-69.0
-66.0
-62.0
BER=10-10
-73.5
-70.0
-67.0
-64.0
-60.0
BER=10-6
-74.0
-71.0
-67.5
-65.0
-61.0
BER=10-10
-72.0
-69.0
-65.5
-63.0
-59.0
BER=10-6
-73.5
-70.5
-67.0
-64.5
-60.5
BER=10-10
-71.5
-68.5
-65.0
-62.5
-58.5
BER=10-6
-72.5
-69.5
-66.0
-63.5
-59.0
BER=10-10
-70.5
-67.5
-64.0
-61.5
-57.0
BER=10-6
-71.5
-68.5
-65.0
-62.5
-58.0
BER=10-10
-69.5
-66.5
-63.0
-60.5
-56.0
BER=10-6
-71.0
-68.0
-64.5
-62.0
-57.5
BER=10-10
-69.0
-66.0
-62.5
-60.0
-55.5

7
10
14
20
28
30
40
50
56
AGC dynamic range

BER=10-6


BER=10-6
-22 dBm
Residual BER (RBER)
10-12
13
(dB)
see Tab.93
198
MN.00273.E - 004

CHANNEL
BANDWIDTH
[MHz]
4QAMs
4QAM
16QAMs
16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
512QAM
1024QAM
57.5
55.0
51.5
48.5
46.5
44.0
40.5
38.0
36.0
35.0
10
56.5
53.5
51.0
47.0
45.0
42.5
39.0
36.5
33.5
29.5
14
56.5
53.0
50.0
46.5
44.5
42.0
38.5
35.5
33.0
32.5
20
55.0
51.5
48.5
45.0
43.0
40.5
37.0
34.0
31.0
27.0
28
53.5
50.0
46.5
43.5
42.0
39.0
36.0
32.5
30.5
30.0
30
53.0
49.5
46.0
43.0
14.5
38.5
35.5
32.0
29.5
25.5
40
52.0
48.5
45.0
42.0
40.0
37.5
34.5
31.0
28.5
24.0
50
51.0
47.5
44.0
41.0
39.0
36.5
33.5
30.0
27.5
23.0
56
50.5
47.0
43.5
40.5
38.5
36.0
33.0
29.5
27.0
22.5
19.2.4
-
Radio flange
19.2.5
UBR 220
48 Vdc 15%
Power consumption
see Tab.94
19.2.6
-
Typical Power
Consumption (W)
Guaranteed Power
Consumption (W)
33.5
35
see Tab.95
Width (mm)
Height (mm)
Depth (mm)
270.4
287.3
154.6
MN.00273.E - 004
4.3 kg
199
20
20.1
FOREWORD
ITU-R F.637-3 and CEPT Recommendation T/R 13-02 for RF channel arrangement
class 2.3).
20.2
GENERAL
20.2.1
-
Frequency band
see Tab.96
200
FREQUENCY RANGE
[MHz]
DUPLEX SPACING
[MHz]
REFERENCE
RECOMMENDATION
22000 23600
1008
ITU-R F.637-3 - Annex 3

CEPT T/R 13-02
21200 23600
1232
21200 23600
1200
21200 23600
1200
Modulation scheme:
Capacity:
see Tab.97
MN.00273.E - 004
RF filter range:
Transceiver tuning range:
See Tab.98
The frequency carrier limits are given in Tab.99, Tab.100 and Tab.101.
Tab.97 - Net radio throughtput in Mbit/s versus channel bandwidth for ALFOplus equipment
MODULATION TYPE
10
14
20
28
30
40
50
56
4QAMs
9.295
11.408
16.393
23.231
32.956
35.117
46.462
58.078
65.912
4QAM
10.872
15.328
22.025
31.213
44.279
47.183
62.426
78.033
88.558
16QAMs
16.225
22.875
32.870
46.581
66.081
70.414
93.163
116.454
132.161
16QAM
21.080
29.720
42.705
60.520
85.854
91.484
121.040
151.300
171.708
32QAM
24.483
34.517
49.599
70.289
99.713
106.251
140.578
175.723
199.425
64QAM
30.293
42.707
61.368
86.968
123.373
131.463
173.936
217.420
246.746
128QAM
36.102
50.898
73.137
103.647
147.034
156.675
207.294
259.117
294.068
256QAM
41.912
59.088
84.906
120.326
170.694
181.887
240.651
300.814
341.389
512QAM
47.763
67.279
96.759
137.004
194.524
207.100
274.009
342.511
389.048
1024QAM
53.572
75.469
108.529
153.529
218.185
232.312
307.336
384.208
436.369

ITU-R F.637-3 - Annex 3 and CEPT T/R 13-02 - f0=21196 MHz
Sub Band
22002.75 22338.75
23010.75 23346.75
22254.75 22590.75
23262.75 23598.75
RF Filter Tuning
Range [MHz]
336

ITU-R F.637-3 - Annex 1 - f0=21196 MHz
Sub Band
RF Filter Tuning
Range [MHz]
21224 21616
22456 22848
392
21616 22008
22848 23240
392
22008 22344
23240 23576
336

ITU-R F.637-3 - Annex 4 - f0=21196 MHz
Sub Band
RF Filter Tuning
Range [MHz]
21200 21605.5
22400 22805.5
405.5
21600 22000
22800 23200
400
21997.5 22400
23197.5 23600
402.5
MN.00273.E - 004
201
Tab.99 - 21200 MHz 23600 MHz band - ITU-R F.637-3 - Annex 3 and CEPT T/R 13-02 Go-return 1008 MHz - Frequency carrier limits
SUB BAND 1
Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]
Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
22006.25
22335.25
23014.25
23343.25
14
22009.75
22331.75
23017.75
23339.75
28
22016.75
22324.75
23024.75
23332.75
56
22030.75
22310.75
23038.75
23318.75
SUB BAND 2
Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]
202
Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
22258.25
22587.25
23266.25
23595.25
14
22261.75
22583.75
23269.75
23591.75
28
22268.75
22576.75
23276.75
23584.75
56
22282.75
22562.75
23290.75
23570.75
MN.00273.E - 004
Tab.100 - 21200 MHz 23600 MHz band - ITU-R F.637-3 - Annex 1 - Go-return 1232 MHz - Frequency carrier limits
FREQUENCY RANGE: 21200 23600 MHz - GO-RETURN: 1232 MHz - ITU-R F.637-3 - Annex 1 - 392336 MHz RF Filter Tuning Range
SUB BAND 1
Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]
Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
21227.5
21612.5
22459.5
22844.5
14
21231
21609
22463
22841
28
21238
21602
22470
22834
56
21252
21588
22484
22820
SUB BAND 2
Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]
Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
21619.5
22004.5
22851.5
23236.5
14
21623
22001
22855
23233
28
21630
21994
22862
23226
56
21644
21980
22876
23212
SUB BAND 3
Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]
Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
22011.5
22340.5
23243.5
23572.5
14
22015
22337
23247
23569
28
22022
22330
23254
23562
56
22036
22316
23268
23548
MN.00273.E - 004
203
Tab.101 - 21200 MHz 23600 MHz band - ITU-R F.637-3 Annex 4 - Go-return 1200 MHz - Frequency carrier limits
FREQUENCY RANGE: 21200 23600 MHz - GO-RETURN: 1200 MHz - ITU-R F.637-3 Annex 4 - 400 402.5 - 405.5 MHz RF Filter Tuning Range
SUB BAND 1
Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]
Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
21217
21602
22417
22802
14
21220.5
21598.5
22420.5
22798.5
28
21227.5
21591.5
22427.5
22791.5
56
21241.5
21577.5
22441.5
22777.5
SUB BAND 2
Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]
Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
21609
21994
22809
23194
14
21612.5
21990.5
22812.5
23190.5
28
21619.5
21983.5
22819.5
23183.5
56
21633.5
21969.5
22833.5
23169.5
SUB BAND 3
Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
22001
22386
23201
23586
14
22004.5
22382.5
23204.5
23582.5
28
22011.5
22375.5
23211.5
23575.5
56
22025.5
22361.5
23225.5
23561.5
Tab.102 - 21200 MHz 23600 MHz band - FCC CFR Title 47 Part 101 - Go-Return 1200 MHz Frequency carrier limits
FREQUENCY RANGE: 21200 23600 MHz - GO-RETURN: 1200 MHz FCC CFR Title 47 Part 101 - 405.5-400-402.5 MHz RF Filter Tuning Range
SUB BAND 1
Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]
204
Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
10
21205
21600.5
22405
22800.5
20
21210
21595.5
22410
22795.5
30
21215
21590.5
22415
22790.5
40
21220
21585.5
22420
22785.5
MN.00273.E - 004
50
21225
21580.5
22425
21780.5
SUB BAND 2
Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]
Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
10
21605
21995
22805
23195
20
21610
21990
22810
23190
30
21615
21985
22815
23185
40
21620
21980
22820
23180
50
21625
21975
22825
23175
SUB BAND 3
Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]
10
22002.5
22395
23202.5
23586
20
22007.5
22390
23207.5
23590
30
22012.5
22385
23212.5
23585
40
22017.5
22380
23217.5
23580
50
22022.5
22375
23222.5
23575
MN.00273.E - 004
205
20.2.2
-
see Tab.103
206
MODULATION

[dBm]

[dBm]
4QAMs
23
21
4QAM
23
21
16QAMs
21
19
16QAM
21
19
32QAM
19
17
64QAM
19
17
128QAM
19
17
256QAM
19
17
512QAM
19
17
1024QAM
18
16
Nominal Power
Tolerance
2 dB

followed.
Tx bandwidth
see Tab.98
Frequency agility
following ITU-R/CEPT channel plans or at

250 kHz steps
20 dB
Attenuation Step
1 dB step
20 dB
2 dB
20 dB
Spurious emissions
5 ppm
Muting attenuation
60 db
1 dB
MN.00273.E - 004
20.2.3
Receiver bandwidth
see Tab.98
Noise figure
7 dB
see Tab.104
CHANNEL BANDWIDTH
[MHz]
ENBW [MHz]
6.1
10
8.6
14
12.2
20
17.2
28
24.4
30
26
40
34.4
50
43
56
48.8
see Tab.105

7
10
14
20
28
30
40
50
56
MN.00273.E - 004
4QAMs
4QAM
16QAMs
16QAM
32QAM
BER=10-6
7.5
13.5
15.5
18
BER=10-10
9.5
11
15.5
17.5
20
BER=10-6
7.5
13.5
15.5
18
BER=10-10
9.5
11
15.5
17.5
20
BER=10-6
6.5
13.5
15.5
18
BER=10-10
8.5
11
15.5
17.5
20
BER=10-6
6.5
13.5
16
18
BER=10-10
8.5
11
15.5
18
20
BER=10-6
6.5
13.5
16
18
BER=10-10
8.5
11
15.5
18
20
BER=10-6
6.5
13.5
16
18
BER=10-10
8.5
11
15.5
18
20
BER=10-6
6.5
13.5
16
18
BER=10-10
8.5
11
15.5
18
20
BER=10-6
6.5
13.5
16
18
BER=10-10
8.5
11
15.5
18
20
BER=10-6
6.5
13.5
15.5
18
BER=10-10
8.5
11
15.5
17.5
20
207

7
10
14
20
28
30
40
50
56
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
512QAM
1024QAM
BER=10-6
20.5
23.5
26.5
30
33.5
BER=10-10
22.5
25.5
28.5
32
35.5
BER=10-6
20.5
23.5
26.5
30
33.5
BER=10-10
22.5
25.5
28.5
32
35.5
BER=10-6
20.5
23.5
26.5
30
33
BER=10-10
22.5
25.5
28.5
32
35
BER=10-6
20.5
23.5
26.5
30
33
BER=10-10
22.5
25.5
28.5
32
35
BER=10-6
20.5
23.5
26.5
30
33
BER=10-10
22.5
25.5
28.5
32
35
BER=10-6
20.5
23.5
26.5
30
33
BER=10-10
22.5
25.5
28.5
32
35
BER=10-6
20.5
23.5
26.5
30
33
BER=10-10
22.5
25.5
28.5
32
35
BER=10-6
20.5
23.5
26.5
30
33
BER=10-10
22.5
25.5
28.5
32
35
BER=10-6
20.5
23.5
26.5
30
33
BER=10-10
22.5
25.5
28.5
32
35
see Tab.106
14 Typical receiver sensitivities are 2dB lower
208
MN.00273.E - 004

7
10
14
20
28
30
40
50
56
4QAMs
4QAM
16QAMs
16QAM
32QAM
BER=10-6
-92.5
-90.0
-86.5
-83.5
-81.5
BER=10-10
-90.5
-88.0
-84.5
-81.5
-79.5
BER=10-6
-91.5
-88.5
-85.0
-82.0
-80.0
BER=10-10
-89.5
-86.5
-83.0
-80.0
-78.0
BER=10-6
-91.5
-88.0
-85.0
-81.5
-79.5
BER=10-10
-89.5
-86.0
-83.0
-79.5
-77.5
BER=10-6
-90.0
-86.5
-83.0
-80.0
-78.0
BER=10-10
-88.0
-84.5
-81.0
-78.0
-76.0
BER=10-6
-88.5
-85.0
-81.5
-78.5
-77.0
BER=10-10
-86.5
-83.0
-79.5
-76.5
-75.0
BER=10-6
-88.0
-84.5
-81.0
-78.0
-76.5
BER=10-10
-86.0
-82.5
-79.0
-76.0
-74.5
BER=10-6
-87.0
-83.5
-80.0
-77.0
-75.0
BER=10-10
-85.0
-81.5
-78.0
-75.0
-73.0
BER=10-6
-86.0
-82.5
-79.0
-76.0
-74.0
BER=10-10
-84.0
-80.5
-77.0
-74.0
-72.0
BER=10-6
-85.5
-82.0
-78.5
-75.5
-73.5
BER=10-10
-83.5
-80.0
-76.5
-73.5
-71.5
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
512QAM
1024QAM
BER=10-6
-79.0
-75.5
-73.0
-70.0
-66.5
BER=10-10
-77.0
-73.5
-71.0
-68.0
-64.5
BER=10-6
-77.5
-74.0
-71.5
-68.5
-64.5
BER=10-10
-75.5
-72.0
-69.5
-66.5
-62.5
BER=10-6
-77.0
-73.5
-70.5
-67.5
-63.5
BER=10-10
-75.0
-71.5
-68.5
-65.5
-61.5
BER=10-6
-75.5
-72.0
-69.0
-66.0
-62.0
BER=10-10
-73.5
-70.0
-67.0
-64.0
-60.0
BER=10-6
-74.0
-71.0
-67.5
-65.0
-61.0
BER=10-10
-72.0
-69.0
-65.5
-63.0
-59.0
BER=10-6
-73.5
-70.5
-67.0
-64.5
-60.5
BER=10-10
-71.5
-68.5
-65.0
-62.5
-58.5
BER=10-6
-72.5
-69.5
-66.0
-63.5
-59.0
BER=10-10
-70.5
-67.5
-64.0
-61.5
-57.0
BER=10-6
-71.5
-68.5
-65.0
-62.5
-58.0
BER=10-10
-69.5
-66.5
-63.0
-60.5
-56.0

7
10
14
20
28
30
40
50
MN.00273.E - 004
209
56
BER=10-6
-71.0
-68.0
-64.5
-62.0
-57.5
BER=10-10
-69.0
-66.0
-62.5
-60.0
-55.5
AGC dynamic range

BER=10-6

BER=10-6
Maximum input level for BER
Residual BER (RBER)
10-6
-22 dBm
10-12
15
(dB)
see Tab.107

CHANNEL
BANDWIDTH
[MHz]
4QAMs
4QAM
16QAMs
16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
512QAM
1024QAM
57.5
55.0
51.5
48.5
46.5
44.0
40.5
38.0
35.0
31.5
10
57.5
53.5
50.0
47.0
45.0
42.5
39.0
36.5
33.5
29.5
14
56.5
53.0
50.0
46.5
44.5
42.0
38.5
35.5
33.0
32.5
20
55.0
51.5
48.0
45.0
43.0
40.5
37.0
34.0
31.0
27.0
28
53.5
50.0
46.5
43.5
42.0
39.0
36.0
32.5
30.5
30.0
30
53.0
49.5
46.0
43.0
41.5
38.5
35.5
32.0
29.5
25.5
40
52.0
48.5
45.0
42.0
40.0
37.5
34.5
31.0
28.5
24.0
50
51.0
47.5
44.0
51.0
39.0
36.5
33.5
30.0
27.5
23.0
56
50.5
47.0
43.5
40.5
38.5
36.0
33.0
29.5
27.0
22.5
20.2.4
-
Radio flange
20.2.5
UBR220
48 Vdc 15%
Power Consumption
see Tab.108
210
MN.00273.E - 004
Tab.108 - Power Consumption
20.2.6
-
Typical Power
Consumption (W)
Guaranteed Power
Consumption (W)
33.5
35
see Tab.109
Width (mm)
Height (mm)
Depth (mm)
270.4
287.3
154.6
MN.00273.E - 004
4.3 kg
211
21
21.1
FOREWORD
ITU-R F749-2 and CEPT Recommendation T/R 12-01 for RF channel arrangement
class 2.3).
21.2
GENERAL
21.2.1
-
Frequency band
see Tab.110
FREQUENCY RANGE
[MHz]
DUPLEX SPACING
[MHz]
REFERENCE
RECOMMENDATION
37000 39500
1260
ITU-R F749-2 - CEPT T/R 12-01
Modulation scheme
4QAMs/QAM/16QAMs/16QAM/32QAM/64QAM/
Capacity
see Tab.111
RF filter range
see Tab.112
The frequency carrier limits are given in Tab.113.
212
MN.00273.E - 004
MODULATION TYPE
14
28
56
4QAMs
9.295
16.393
32.956
65.912
4QAM
10.872
22.025
44.279
88.558
16QAMs
16.225
32.870
66.081
132.161
16QAM
21.080
42.705
85.854
171.708
32QAM
24.483
49.599
99.713
199.425
64QAM
30.293
61.368
123.373
246.746
128QAM
36.102
73.137
147.034
294.068
256QAM
41.912
84.906
170.694
341.389
512QAM
47.763
96.759
194.524
389.048
1024QAM
53.572
108.529
218.185
436.369

ITU-R F.749-2 Annex 1 and CEPT REC T/R 12-01 Annex A - f0=38248 MHz
Sub Band
Lower Half Limits

[MHz]
Upper Half Limits

[MHz]
37058 37618
38318 38878
37618 38178
38878 39438
RF Filter Tuning
Range [MHz]
560
Tab.113 - 37058 MHz 39438 MHz band - Go-Return 1260 MHz - frequency carrier limits
SUB BAND 1
Channel
bandwidth
(MHz)
Lowest Frequency
Carrier (MHz)
Highest Frequency
Carrier (MHz)
Lowest Frequency
Carrier (MHz)
Highest Frequency
Carrier (MHz)
37061.5
37614.5
38321.5
38874.5
14
37065
37611
38325
38871
28
37072
37604
38332
38864
56
37086
37590
38346
38850
SUB BAND 2
Channel
bandwidth
(MHz)
Lowest Frequency
Carrier (MHz)
Highest Frequency
Carrier (MHz)
Lowest Frequency
Carrier (MHz)
Highest Frequency
Carrier (MHz)
37621.5
38174.5
38881.5
39434.5
14
37625
38171
38885
39431
28
37632
38164
38892
39424
56
37646
38150
38906
39410
MN.00273.E - 004
213
21.2.2
-
see Tab.114
214
MODULATION

(dBm)
Guaranteed Output
Power (dBm)
4QAMs
19
17
4QAM
19
17
16QAMs
17
15
16QAM
17
15
32QAM
15
13
64QAM
15
13
128QAM
15
13
256QAM
15
13
512QAM
15
13
1024QAM
14
12
Nominal Power
Tolerance
2 dB

reference modulation the Mean Constant Mode
is followed.
Tx bandwidth
see Tab.111
Frequency agility

steps
20 dB
Attenuation Step
1 dB step
20 dB
2 dB
20 dB
Spurious emissions
5 ppm
Muting attenuation
60 db
1 dB
MN.00273.E - 004
21.2.3
Receiver bandwidth
see Tab.111
Noise Figure
9 dB
Equivalent Noise Bandwidth (MHz)
see Tab.115
Tab.115 - Equivalent Noise Bandwidth (MHz)
ENBW (MHz)
6.4
14
12.2
28
24.4
56
48.8
see Tab.116

7
14
28
56
4QAMs
4QAM
16QAMs
16QAM
32QAM
BER=10-6
13.5
15.5
18
BER=10-10
11
15.5
17.5
20
BER=10-6
6.5
13.5
15.5
18
BER=10-10
8.5
11
15.5
17.5
20
BER=10-6
6.5
13.5
16
18
BER=10-10
8.5
11
15.5
18
20
BER=10-6
6.5
13.5
15.5
18
BER=10-10
8.5
11
15.5
17.5
20
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
512QAM
1024QAM
BER=10-6
20.5
23.5
26.5
30
33.5
BER=10-10
22.5
25.5
28.5
32
35.5
BER=10-6
20.5
23.5
26.5
30
33
BER=10-10
22.5
25.5
28.5
32
35
BER=10-6
20.5
23.5
26.5
30
33
BER=10-10
22.5
25.5
28.5
32
35
BER=10-6
20.5
23.5
26.5
30
33
BER=10-10
22.5
25.5
28.5
32
35

7
14
28
56
Guaranteed receiver sensitivities16 (dBm)
see Tab.117
16 Typical receiver sensitivities are 2dB lower
MN.00273.E - 004
215
Tab.117 - Guaranteed receiver sensitivities (dBm)

7
14
28
56
4QAMs
4QAM
16QAMs
16QAM
32QAM
BER=10-6
-90.5
-88
-84.5
-81.5
-79.5
BER=10-10
-88.5
-86.0
-82.5
-79.5
-77.5
BER=10-6
-89.5
-86
-83
-79.5
-77.5
BER=10-10
-87.5
-84.0
-81.0
-77.5
-75.5
BER=10-6
-86.5
-83
-79.5
-76.5
-75
BER=10-10
-84.5
-81.0
-77.5
-74.5
-73.0
BER=10-6
-83.5
-80
-76.5
-73.5
-71.5
BER=10-10
-81.5
-78.0
-74.5
-71.5
-69.5
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
512QAM
1024QAM
BER=10-6
-77.0
-73.5
-71.0
-68.0
-64.5
BER=10-10
-75.0
-71.5
-69.0
-66.0
-62.5
BER=10-6
-75.0
-71.5
-68.5
-65.5
-61.5
BER=10-10
-73.0
-69.5
-66.5
-63.5
-59.5
BER=10-6
-72.0
-69.0
-65.5
-63.0
-59.0
BER=10-10
-70.0
-67.0
-63.5
-61.0
-57.0
BER=10-6
-69.0
-66.0
-62.5
-60.0
-55.5
BER=10-10
-67.0
-64.0
-60.5
-58.0
-53.5

7
14
28
56
AGC dynamic range

BER=10-6


BER=10-6
-22 dBm
Residual BER (RBER)
10-12
17
(dB)
see Tab.118

CHANNEL
BANDWIDTH
[MHz]
4QAMs
4QAM
16QAMs
16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
512QAM
1024QAM
55.5
53
49.5
46.5
44.5
42
38.5
36
33
29.5
14
54.5
51
48
44.5
42.5
40
36.5
33.5
30.5
26.5
28
51.5
48
44.5
41.5
40
37
34
30.5
28
24
56
48.5
45
41.5
38.5
36.5
34
31
27.5
25
20.5
17 Range over which at least RBER performances are guaranteed (-25 dBm Threshold @ 10-6 +10dB)
216
MN.00273.E - 004
21.2.4
-
Radio flange
21.2.5
UBR 320
48 Vdc 15%
Power consumption
see Tab.119
21.2.6
-
Typical Power
Consumption [W]
Guaranteed Power
Consumption [W]
34
36
see Tab.120
Width [mm]
Height [mm]
Depth [mm]
270.4
287.3
154.6
MN.00273.E - 004
4.3 Kg
217
218
MN.00273.E - 004
Section 9.
LISTS AND SERVICES
22
LIST OF FIGURES
Fig.1 - Components electrostatic charge sensitive indication................................................ 10

Fig.2 - Elasticized band .................................................................................................. 10
Fig.3 - Coiled cord ......................................................................................................... 10
Fig.4 - Laser indication................................................................................................... 10
Fig.5 - WEEE symbol - 2002/96/CE EN50419 .................................................................... 11
Fig.6 - ALFOplus front/side view ...................................................................................... 20
Fig.7 - Reachable links in ALFOplus sub-network ............................................................... 21
Fig.8 - In-band management .......................................................................................... 22
Fig.9 - Drop node .......................................................................................................... 22
Fig.10 - LAO (Local Access Only) ..................................................................................... 22
Fig.11 - C60507 (48Vin 2 ports PoE injector) .................................................................... 48
Fig.12 - C60506 (48Vin 4 ports PoE injector) .................................................................... 48
Fig.13 - PoE injector interface ......................................................................................... 49
Fig.14 - ALFOplus GE ..................................................................................................... 53
Fig.15 - ALFOplus GO..................................................................................................... 54
Fig.16 - ALFOplus block diagram ..................................................................................... 57
Fig.17 - Synchronisation block diagram ............................................................................ 59
Fig.18 - ATPC diagram ................................................................................................... 61
Fig.19 - Available loops .................................................................................................. 62
Fig.20 -........................................................................................................................ 65
Fig.21 - Red curve......................................................................................................... 66
Fig.22 - Ethernet frame fragmentation disabled ................................................................. 68
Fig.23 - Ethernet frame fragmentation enabled ................................................................. 68
Fig.24 - Header compression .......................................................................................... 70
Fig.25 - Line trunking .................................................................................................... 71
Fig.26 - Hierarchical structure of maintenance domains ...................................................... 73
MN.00273.E - 004
219
Fig.27 - Node B and BTS synch ....................................................................................... 77

Fig.28 - SETS circuit ...................................................................................................... 77
Fig.29 - Synchronisation menu........................................................................................ 78
Fig.30 - Sources of synchronisation ................................................................................. 79
Fig.31 - Provide synchronism .......................................................................................... 80
Fig.32 - LAN synchronisation method ............................................................................... 82
Fig.33 - Grounding connection ........................................................................................ 87
Fig.34 - ODU with standard coupling kit ........................................................................... 95
Fig.35 - 1+0 ODU installation.......................................................................................... 96
Fig.36 - Polarization disk ................................................................................................ 97
Fig.37 - 1+1 ODU installation.......................................................................................... 98
Fig.38 - 1+0 antenna flange ........................................................................................... 99
Fig.39 - 1+1 antenna flange ......................................................................................... 100
Fig.40 - Functional drawing........................................................................................... 102
Fig.41 - Cable connection side M12 (screw connection)..................................................... 102
Fig.42 - Pin assignment M12 socket, 5-pos., A-coded, socket side view .............................. 102
Fig.43 - Dimensioned drawing - M12 connector ............................................................... 103
Fig.44 - T-568A Straight-Through Ethernet cable ............................................................. 104
Fig.45 - RJ-45 Pinout ................................................................................................... 105
Fig.46 - Indoor RJ45 unshielded assembly ...................................................................... 105
Fig.47 ........................................................................................................................ 105
Fig.48 ........................................................................................................................ 106
Fig.49 ........................................................................................................................ 107
Fig.50 - Cable connector keys ....................................................................................... 108
Fig.51 -...................................................................................................................... 109
Fig.52 ........................................................................................................................ 109
Fig.53 - PO0032 .......................................................................................................... 110
Fig.54 - Connector positions ......................................................................................... 111
Fig.55 ........................................................................................................................ 112
Fig.56 - F03594 cable for laboratory use only.................................................................. 114
Fig.57 - F03608 cable for pointing (remove it after commission pointing)............................ 115
Fig.58 - ALFOplus connectors ........................................................................................ 116
Fig.59 - SFP LC/LC ...................................................................................................... 116
Fig.60 - SFP LC/OPEN END ........................................................................................... 116
Fig.61 - SFP LC/ SFP LC ............................................................................................... 117
Fig.62 - LC connector................................................................................................... 117
Fig.63 - SFP into ALFOplus............................................................................................ 117
Fig.64 - Locked connection ........................................................................................... 118
Fig.65 - Unplug SFP ..................................................................................................... 118
Fig.66 - IP address setting............................................................................................ 121
Fig.67 - Local area connection....................................................................................... 121
Fig.68 - Rescue login ................................................................................................... 122
Fig.69 - Bandwidth&Modulation, Local Link ID ................................................................. 123
220
MN.00273.E - 004
Fig.70 - Frequency and power setting ............................................................................ 124

Fig.71 - Port configuration ............................................................................................ 125
Fig.72 - Equipment properties ....................................................................................... 125
Fig.73 - Remote element list ......................................................................................... 126
Fig.74 - Main menu with Rx signal power level ................................................................ 128
Fig.75 - S/N measurement monitoring ........................................................................... 128
Fig.76 - Vertical and horizontal adjustment ..................................................................... 129
Fig.77 - Antenna aiming block....................................................................................... 130
Fig.78 - Software download procedure ........................................................................... 132
Fig.79 - Upgrade software ............................................................................................ 132
Fig.80 - Backup/Restore configuration............................................................................ 134
Fig.81 - Current alarm monitoring ................................................................................. 141
Fig.82 - Event log window ............................................................................................ 142
Fig.83 - Traffic management of "ALFOplus" unit............................................................... 144
Fig.84 - Local access only ............................................................................................. 145
Fig.85 - VLAN based in-band management ..................................................................... 146
Fig.86 - VLAN based In-band drop node ......................................................................... 146
Fig.87 - Out-of-band management................................................................................. 147
MN.00273.E - 004
221
222
MN.00273.E - 004
23
LIST OF TABLES
Tab.1 - Artificial respiration .............................................................................................. 9

Tab.2 - Go-return frequency ............................................................................................23
Tab.3 - Tx power............................................................................................................25
Tab.4 - Receiver thresholds (interleave enabled) ................................................................26
Tab.5 - Noise figure ........................................................................................................38
Tab.6 - ACM switching thresholds .....................................................................................39
Tab.7 - Guaranteed Ethernet Latency (ms) for ALFOplus .....................................................43
Tab.8 - Guaranteed Ethernet Throughput (Mbit/s) for ALFOplus without Ethernet compression..45
Tab.9 - Interface characteristics .......................................................................................46
Tab.10 - Power consumption (W) .....................................................................................46
Tab.11 - PoE injector supported .......................................................................................47
Tab.12 - Code Table .......................................................................................................48
Tab.13 - Electrical characteristics .....................................................................................49
Tab.14 - Connectors .......................................................................................................49
Tab.15 - Description of alarms .........................................................................................49
Tab.16 - Type ................................................................................................................50
Tab.17 - Maximum length................................................................................................50
Tab.18 - ODU dimension .................................................................................................51
Tab.19 - bootstrap status display .....................................................................................56
Tab.20 - Mounting Instructions ........................................................................................88
Tab.21 - Torques for tightening screws..............................................................................91
Tab.22 - Waveguide bending radius according to frequency .................................................94
Tab.23 - Auxiliary power cable ....................................................................................... 101
Tab.24 - Pinout M12 connector....................................................................................... 103
Tab.25 - Part to be assembled ....................................................................................... 103
Tab.26 - List of Amphenol optical cable ........................................................................... 113
Tab.27 - Voltage measured in auxiliary port ..................................................................... 127
Tab.28 - Ethernet connection stability ............................................................................. 131
Tab.29 - Alarms ........................................................................................................... 136
Tab.30 - Configurations................................................................................................. 145
Tab.31 - RF band and RF filter band ............................................................................... 150
Tab.32 - Frequency band............................................................................................... 156
Tab.33 - Net Radio Throughput in Mbit/s versus channel bandwidth for ALFOplus equipment .. 157
Tab.34 - Filter sub-bands for ALFOplus 11GHz.................................................................. 157
Tab.35 - 10700 MHz - 11700 MHz band - Go-return 490 MHz - Frequency carrier limits ......... 158
Tab.36 - 10700 MHz - 11700 MHz band - Go-return 530 MHz - Frequency carrier limits ......... 159
Tab.37 - 10700 MHz - 11700 MHz band - FCC CFR Title 47 Part 101 - Go-Return 490 MHz - Fre-
MN.00273.E - 004
223
quency carrier limits ...................................................................................................... 159

Tab.38 - 10700 MHz - 11700 MHz band - FCC CFR Title 47 Part 101 - Go-Return 500 MHz - Frequency carrier limits ...................................................................................................... 160
Tab.39 - Maximum transmit power ................................................................................. 161
Tab.40 - Equivalent Noise Bandwidth [MHz] .................................................................... 162
Tab.41 - Signal to Noise Ratio [dB] ................................................................................ 162
Tab.42 ........................................................................................................................163
Tab.43 - Receiver Dynamic Range [dB] ........................................................................... 164
Tab.44 - Power consumption.......................................................................................... 165
Tab.45 - Physical size of system components ................................................................... 165
Tab.47 - Net Radio Throughput in Mbit/s versus Channel Bandwidth for ALFOplus equipment 167
Tab.48 - RF filter sub-bands for ALFOplus 13GHz .............................................................. 167
Tab.49 - 12.75 13.25 GHz band - Go-Return 266 MHz - Frequency carrier limits................ 168
Tab.50 - Maximum transmit power ................................................................................ 169
Tab.51 - Equivalent Noise Bandwidth .............................................................................. 170
Tab.52 - Signal to Noise Ratio [dB] ................................................................................ 170
Tab.53 - Guaranteed receiver sensitivities [dBm].............................................................. 171
Tab.54 - Receiver Dynamic Range .................................................................................. 172
Tab.56 - Physical size of system components .................................................................. 172
Tab.58 - Net Radio throughput in Mbit/s versus Channel Bandwidth for ALFOplus equipment .. 174
Tab.59 - RF filter sub-bands for ALFOplus 15 GHz ............................................................. 175
Tab.60 - 14501 - 14348 MHz band - Go-Return 420 MHz - Frequency carrier limits ............... 176
Tab.61 - 1403 - 15348 MHz band - Go-return 490 MHz - Frequency carrier limits.................. 177
Tab.65 -Maximum transmit power ................................................................................. 181
Tab.66 - Equivalent Noise Bandwidth [MHz] ..................................................................... 182
Tab.67 - Signal to Noise Ratio (dB) ................................................................................. 182
Tab.69 - Receiver Dynamic Range .................................................................................. 184
Tab.71 - Physical size of system components ................................................................... 184
Tab.73 - Net Radio Throughput in Mbit/s versus Channel Bandwidth for ALFOplus equipment . 186
Tab.75 - 17100 MHz 17300 MHz band - Go-return 144 MHz - Frequency carrier limits ........ 186
Tab.76 - Maximum transmit power ................................................................................ 187
Tab.78 - Signal to Noise Ratio (dB)................................................................................. 188
224
MN.00273.E - 004

Tab.80 - Receiver Dynamic Range (dB) ........................................................................... 189
Tab.84 - Net Radio Throughput in Mbit/s versus Channel Bandwidth for ALFOplus equipment . 192
Tab.86 - 17700 MHz 19700 MHz band - Go-return 1010 - Frequency carrier limits ............. 193
Tab.87 - 17700 MHz 18140 MHz paired with 19260 MHz - 19700 MHz band go-return 1560 MHz
- Frequency carrier limits ............................................................................................... 194
Tab.88 - 17700 MHz 18140 MHz paired with 19260 MHz 17700 MHz 19700 MHz band - FCC
CFR Title 47 Part 101 - Go-Return 1560 MHz - Frequency carrier limits................................. 194
Tab.89 - Maximum transmit power ................................................................................. 195
Tab.91 - Signal to Noise Ratio (dB)................................................................................. 196
Tab.93 - Receiver Dynamic Range (dB) ........................................................................... 199
Tab.97 - Net radio throughtput in Mbit/s versus channel bandwidth for ALFOplus equipment .. 201
Tab.98 - RF filter sub-bands for ALFOplus 23 GHz ............................................................. 201
Tab.99 - 21200 MHz 23600 MHz band - ITU-R F.637-3 - Annex 3 and CEPT T/R 13-02 Go-return 1008 MHz - Frequency carrier limits .................................................................. 202
Tab.100 - 21200 MHz 23600 MHz band - ITU-R F.637-3 - Annex 1 - Go-return 1232 MHz - Frequency carrier limits ...................................................................................................... 203
Tab.101 - 21200 MHz 23600 MHz band - ITU-R F.637-3 Annex 4 - Go-return 1200 MHz - Frequency carrier limits ...................................................................................................... 204
Tab.102 - 21200 MHz 23600 MHz band - FCC CFR Title 47 Part 101 - Go-Return 1200 MHz Frequency carrier limits.................................................................................................. 204
Tab.103 - Maximum transmit power ............................................................................... 206
Tab.104 - Equivalent Noise Bandwidth [MHz] ................................................................... 207
Tab.105 - Signal to Noise Ratio (dB) ............................................................................... 207
Tab.106 - Guaranteed receiver sensitivities [dBm] ........................................................... 209
Tab.107 - Receiver Dynamic Range (dB) ........................................................................ 210
Tab.108 - Power Consumption ....................................................................................... 211
Tab.109 - Physical size of system components ................................................................ 211
Tab.110 - Frequency band ............................................................................................. 212
Tab.111 - Net Radio Throughput in Mbit/s versus Channel Bandwidth for ALFOplus equipment 213
Tab.112 - RF filter sub-bands for ALFOplus 38 GHz ........................................................... 213
Tab.113 - 37058 MHz 39438 MHz band - Go-Return 1260 MHz - frequency carrier limits .... 213
Tab.114 - Maximum transmit power ............................................................................... 214
Tab.115 - Equivalent Noise Bandwidth (MHz) .................................................................. 215
Tab.116 - Signal to Noise Ratio (dB) ............................................................................... 215
Tab.117 - Guaranteed receiver sensitivities (dBm) ............................................................ 216
MN.00273.E - 004
225
Tab.118 - Receiver Dynamic Range (dB) ......................................................................... 216

Tab.119 - Power consumption ........................................................................................ 217
Tab.120 - Physical size of system components ................................................................. 217
226
MN.00273.E - 004
24
ASSISTANCE SERVICE
For more information, refer to the section relevant to the technical support on the Internet site of the company manufacturing the product.
MN.00273.E - 004
227
228
MN.00273.E - 004

SIAE ALFOplus - User Manual Cod. MN00273E - Ediz.004 Ok

Enviado por

Dados do documento

Descrição original:

Título original

Direitos autorais

Formatos disponíveis

Compartilhar este documento

Compartilhar ou incorporar documento

Opções de compartilhamento

Você considera este documento útil?

Este conteúdo é inapropriado?

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

SIAE ALFOplus - User Manual Cod. MN00273E - Ediz.004 Ok

Enviado por

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

ALFOplus

Access Link Full Outdoor

The information contained in this handbook is subject to change without notice.

DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY ............................................................................... 7

FIRST AID FOR ELECTRICAL SHOCK ..................................................................... 8

SAFETY RULES .................................................................................................10

CORRECT DISPOSAL OF THIS PRODUCT (WASTE ELECTRICAL &

PURPOSE AND STRUCTURE OF THE MANUAL ............................................................12

PURPOSE OF THE MANUAL .................................................................................12

AUDIENCE BASIC KNOWLEDGE ..........................................................................12

STRUCTURE OF THE MANUAL .............................................................................12

LIST OF ACRONYMS .................................................................................................15

LIST OF ACRONYMS ..........................................................................................15

SYSTEM PRESENTATION ..........................................................................................17

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION ....................................................................................23

INTERNATIONAL STANDARD ..............................................................................23

LINE INTERFACE CHARACTERISTICS ...................................................................42

POWER SUPPLY AND CABLE ...............................................................................46

PoE injector functionality ...........................................................47

Electrical characteristics ............................................................49

Description of alarms ................................................................49

WAVEGUIDE FLANGE ........................................................................................50

SURGE AND LIGHTNING PROTECTION .................................................................51

ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS ..........................................................................51

EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION ......................................................................................52

Web Lct ..................................................................................55

Alarm system ..........................................................................55

7.1.3 TRX Transceiver unit ...............................................................................56

RATE LIMITING AND INGRESS FILTER POLICING ..................................................62

CONGESTION AVOIDANCE .................................................................................65

ETHERNET OAM (OPERATION ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE) .....................72

ETHERNET PERFORMANCE MONITORING - RMON ..................................................74

RMON COUNTERS .............................................................................................75

ADVANCED STATISTIC MONITORING FOR SERVICES AND PRIORITY COUNTERS .......76

SOURCES OF SYNCHRONISM .............................................................................79

PROVIDE SYNCHRONISM TO EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT .............................................80

G.8264 SSM SYNCHRONISATION STATUS MESSAGE...........................................81

INSTALLATION OF ALFOPlus SYSTEM ......................................................................85

GENERAL INFORMATION TO BE READ BEFORE THE INSTALLATION..........................85

CONNECTIONS TO THE SUPPLY MAINS ................................................................86

GROUNDING CONNECTION ................................................................................87

REQUIRED TOOLS FOR MOUNTING (NOT SUPPLIED) .............................................89

1+0 ODU with integrated antenna ..............................................90

1+1 ODU with integrated antenna ..............................................90

INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE ODU WITH SEPARATED ANTENNA...............92

1+0 ODU with separated antenna...............................................92

1+1 ODU with separated antenna...............................................93

Waveguide towards the antenna.................................................93

LINE-UP OF ALFOPlus SYSTEM ...............................................................................119

SWITCH ON ................................................................................................... 119

ALARM LED CHECK ......................................................................................... 120

CONNECTION PROCEDURE............................................................................... 120

FIRST CONFIGURATION................................................................................... 122

OPTIMIZING ANTENNA ALIGNMENT WITH RX MEASUREMENT ............................... 127

ODU ACCESSING AND REMOTE MANAGEMENT.................................................... 130

COMMISSIONING MEASURES FOR ETHERNET TRAFFIC ........................................ 131

FIRMWARE .................................................................................................... 132

BACK UP FULL EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION WITHOUT POSSIBILITY OF

10 ALFOPlus ALARMS AND LOOPS...............................................................................135

ALARMS ........................................................................................................ 135

11 ALFOPlus MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING ...............................................139

MAINTENANCE ............................................................................................... 139